Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
”“Thi k Gl b l St d E li h
”“Think Global, Study English
…Study English with the rest of the world at EP. Your future starts now
ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺮ ﻴﻢ
ﻴﻢ EnglishPersian
g اﻳﻨﺴﺘﮕﺮامم ))((EP
ﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳ
ل ازز ﻴ
ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﺑﻪ ﻳﻳﻚ ﺳﺎل
ﺑﺑﻌﺪ ازز ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺰ ﻳ
ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ي ﮔﺮاﻣﺮ و ﻧﻜﺎت ﮔﺮاﻣﺮي زﺑﺎن ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻦ اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ را ﺑﺮاي ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮاﻫﺎن ﻋﺰﻳﺰ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ
ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ 4ﻣﺎه ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺰوه اي ﻛﻪ اﻛﻨﻮن در دﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ ﺗﻼش ﻛﺮده اﻳﻢ و ﺳﺮاﻧﺠﺎم در اردﻳﺒﻬﺸﺖ 93
ﻧﮕﺎرش اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ .اﻳﻦ ﺟﺰوه ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮاﻣﺮ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ )از ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ( ﺷﺎﻣﻞ 20ﺻﻔﺤﻪ
اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ (E li h
(English ﻫﺎي اﻧﮕﻠ
اﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺎ ) (useful vocabularyو ﺿ
ﺿﺮب اﻟ ﺜﻞ ( f l ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدي ) b l
ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﻛﺎ
راﻳﮕﺎن در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﻠ ﺎ
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ا ﮕﺎ
ﺿ
) proverbsﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
اﻣﻴﺪوارﻳﻢ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده را از ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ.
2
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ
ﻬﺮ
ﻓﻌﻞ:ﻓﺼﻞ اول
7 .................................................................................................................................................................. ﻓﻌﻞ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟
7 ............................................................................... Active Voice and Passive Voice :1 ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻓﻌﻞ
7 .................................................................................................................................................................. Active voice •
8 ..................................................................................................................................................................... Passive voice
Passive voice •
9 ..................................................................... (Main Verbs) ( و اﺻﻠﻲHelping Verbs) ﻛﻤﻜﻲ2: ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻓﻌﻞ
10 ............................................................................................................................................ (Helping Verbs) • اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
10 ................................................................................................................(Primary Helping Verbs) • اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اوﻟﻴﻪ
11 ....................................................................................................................(Modal Helping Verbs) • اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻲ
13 ......................................................................................................................................................... (Main Verbs) • اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ
(
(Dynamic and Stative d Verbs) b ) • اﻓﻌﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ و وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ
(Regular and irregular verbs) • اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﻗﺎﻋﺪه و ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه
(Linking Verbs) • اﻓﻌﺎل ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪي
(Intransitive) ( و ﻻزمTransitive) • اﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﺘﻌﺪي
14 ............................................................................................................................................................................ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه
220 ......................................................................................................................................................................... ﻟﻴﺴﺖ اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه
ﺷﺮط:ﻓﺼﻞ دوم
22 ..............................................................................................................................................................(Conditionals) ﺷﺮط ﻫﺎ
22 ................................................................................................................................................(First Conditional) اوﻟﻴﻦ ﺷﺮط
23 ......................................................................................................................................(Second Conditional) دوﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺮط
24 ..........................................................................................................................................(Third Conditional) ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺮط
25 .................................................................................................................................................(Conditional Zero) ﺷﺮط ﺻﻔﺮ
25 .................................................................................................................................................................................... ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺷﺮط ﻫﺎ
ﺳﺆال:ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮم
26 .............................................................................................................(Basic Question Structure) ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﺆال
26 ..........................................................................................................................(Basic Question Types) اﻧﻮاع اﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﺆال
going to :ﭼﻬﺎرم
ﻞ ﺎ ﻓﻓﺼﻞ
28 .............................................................................................................................................................................(Intention) ﻗﺼﺪ
28 ................................................................................................................................................................(Prediction) ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ
28 ....................................................................(Present continuous for plan) زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي
29 ..............................................................................(Present Simple for schedule) زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده ﺑﺮاي زﻣﺎن ﺑﻨﺪي
29 ..................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. ﺧﻼﺻﻪ
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ:ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ
30 ...................................................................................................................................................................(Gerunds) اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ
3
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ،ﺷﻲء و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه
30 ............................................................................(Gerunds as Subject, Object or Complement)
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ ﭘﺲ از ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ 30 ...............................................................(Gerunds after Prepositions)
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ ﭘﺲ از اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ 31 ....................................................................(Gerunds after certain verbs)
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﭘﺬﻳﺮي 32 ..........................................................................(Gerunds in Passive sense)
ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ :اﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي
اﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي )ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ ﻋﺎﻣﻪ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ)33 ...................................................................................... (Phrasal Verbs
اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ 33 ...................................................................................................................................................(Phrasal Verbs)
اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﺟﺪا ﺷﺪﻧﻲ 34 ........................................................................................................(Separable Phrasal Verbs)
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺿﺎﻓﻲ 35 .......................................................................................................................................(Prepositional Verbs)
35 ...................................................................................................(Prepositional Verbs
)(Prepositional Verbs‐Phrasal ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ Phrasal)
اﺿﺎﻓﻲ – ﻋ ﺎ ﺗ
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺿﺎﻓ
ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ :زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎ
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ )(past
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 37 .............................................................................................................(Continuous Tense Past)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 37 .......................................................................................................................................................
ﻴﻢ 37 ..................................................................................................................................
ن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﻦ ززﻣﺎن
ﻴﻢ ازز اﻳﻦ
ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ
ﻲ ﻮﻮر ﻣﻲ •ﭼ
ﭼﻄﻮر
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 39 ......................................................................(Past Perfect Continuous Tense)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 39 ...................................................................................................................................
• ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 40 ................................................................................................................
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ 41 ...............................................................................................................................(Past Perfect Tense)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ 41 .............................................................................................................................................................
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻛﻨﻴﻢ 41 ................................................................................................................................ زﻣﺎن ا ﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ااز ااﻳﻦ ﺎ
ﭼﻄﻮر ﻣﻲ ا• ﻄ
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده 42 .................................................................................................................................(Simple Past Tense)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده 42 ...............................................................................................................................................................
• ﭼﻄﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ از اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 44 ..................................................................................................................................
ﺣﺎل )(present
46 .............................................................................................................(Present Continuous Tens)
زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري )(Present Continuous Tens
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 46 ............................................................................................................................................................
• ﭼﻪ وﻗﺖ و ﭼﺮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 46 ........................................................................................................
• اﻓﻌﺎل ingدار را در زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ) (Spellﻛﻨﻴﻢ 47 .............................................................................................
زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 48 ............................................................................(Perfect Continuous Tense Present)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 48 .....................................................................................................................................
• ﭼﻄﻮر از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 49 .....................................................................................................................
زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ 51 ............................................................................................................................(Present Perfect Tense)
4
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ 51 ................................................................................................................................
• ﻛﻲ و ﭼﺮا از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 52 .........................................................................................................
• Sinceو For در زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ و ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﻬﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ 53 ...................................................................................................
زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده 54 ................................................................................................................(Simple Present Tense)
• ﭼﻄﻮر از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 54 ..............................................................................................................................
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده 55 ...................................................................................................................................................
آﻳﻨﺪه )(future
زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 57 .........................................................................................................(Future Continuous Tense)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 57 .........................................................................................................................................................
• ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ از زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 58 .............................................................................................................................
58 ..............................................................................(Future Perfect Continuous Tense)
اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري )(Future Perfect Continuous Tense زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤ ا ي
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 58 ...............................................................................................................................................
• ﭼﻄﻮر از زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 59 ....................................................................................................................
زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ 60 ..............................................................................................................................(Future Perfect Tense)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ 60 ..................................................................................................................................................................
• ﭼﻄﻮر از زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 60 ......................................................................................................................................
زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﺳﺎده 61 ..............................................................................................................................(Simple Future Tense)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﺳﺎده 61 .................................................................................................................................................................
• ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ از زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﺳﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ 62 .....................................................................................................................................
ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ :اﺳﻢ
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ 64 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................
ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ 64 ...................................................................................................................................................................................
اﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﭼﻪﻪ ﻫ ﺘﻨﺪ ا ﺎ
• ﭘﺎﻳﺎن اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ 64 .................................................................................................................................................(Noun Endings)
• ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ 64 ..............................................................................................................(Position in Sentence)
• وﻇﻴﻔﻪ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ 65 .........................................................................................................................................................(Functions)
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎرا و ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا 65 .....................................................(Countable Nouns, Uncountable Nouns)
• اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎرا 65 ...................................................................................................................................................................................
•اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا 66 ...................................................................................................................................................................
• اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺷﻤﺎرا و ﻫﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ 67 ................................................................................................
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ 67 ............................................................................................................................................(Proper Nouns)
• ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺣﺮوف ﺑﺰرگ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﻤﻬﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ 68 ........................................................................................................................
• اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺪون 68 .........................................................................................................................................................The
70 ...............................................................................................................................................................The
ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺎﺑﺎ The ﻫﺎي ﺸﺨ • ااﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ
ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻀﺎف اﻟﻴﻪ )ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ داﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰي را ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ( )71 ..................................... (Possessive 's
• ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻀﺎف اﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﺮدن اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ )ﻧﺎم ﻫﺎ( 72 ...............................................................................................................
• ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻀﺎف اﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﺮدن اﺳﻤﻬﺎي ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﺪه 72 ....................................................................................................................
5
ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﻢ :ﺻﻔﺖ
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺎ 73 ............................................................................................................................................(Adjectives)
ﺻﻔﺎت اﺷﺎره ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه 73 .........................................................................................................(Determiners)
• ﺣﺮوف ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ An ، Aو ﻳﺎ 73 ........................................................................................................................................The
74 ........................................................................................................................................................................Every
Each و Every
• Each
• Someو 75 ............................................................................................................................................................................Any
ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺻﻔﺎت76 ......................................................................................................................................... (Adjective orders)
• ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﻢ 76 .................................................................................................................(Adjective before nouns)
• ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻓﻌﻞ 77 ...................................................................................................(verbs Adjective after certain )
ﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ اي 77 .....................................................................................................................(Comparative Adjectives)
• ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ اي 78 ...................................................................................................................................................................
• ﻃﺮز ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ اي 78 .................................................................................................................................................
ﺻﻔﺎت ﺑﺮﺗﺮ 79 .....................................................................................................................................(Superlative Adjectives)
• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ 79 ..................................................................................................................................................................
• ﻃﺮز اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺎت ﺑﺮﺗﺮ 80 ................................................................................................................................................................
ﻓﺼﻞ دﻫﻢ :ﺿﻤﻴﺮ
ﺿﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ 82 ........................................................................................................................................................................(Pronouns)
ﺿﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎي ﺷﺨﺼﻲ 82 ...............................................................................................................................(Personal Pronouns)
ﻓﺼﻞ ﻳﺎزدﻫﻢ :ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ
ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ 84 ...............................................................................................................................................................................
اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
ﺮ ري ﻫﺎي
ن ي در ززﻣﺎن
ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ر
ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻞ
ﻢ :ﻲ
دوازدﻫﻢ
ﻞ وز ﻓﺼﻞ
ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ در زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 85 ..............................................................................................................................................
اﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ 85 ................................................................................................................
اﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ دو ﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ 85 ..................................................................................................................................................................
ﻓﻌﻞ beو زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري 86 .........................................................................................................................................................
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ
ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدي 88 .....................................................................................................................................(useful vocabulary)
ﺿﺮب اﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ 102 ...................................................................................................................(English proverbs)
6
ﻓﺼﻞ اول :ﻓﻌﻞ
ﻓﻌﻞ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ:
ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ در زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼت داراي ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ
ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺴﺎزﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﻞStop! :
ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ run ، fight :و work
work Action wordﻣﻲ ﮔﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ .ﺎﻧ
رﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﻧآﻧﻬﺎ Action word
ﻛﺎري ارا ﻣﻲ ﺎﻧ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎ
اﻓﻌﺎل اﻧ ﺎ
ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ااز اﻓ ﺎل
ﺧ
ﺑﺮﺧﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ و ﻳﺎ وﺟﻮد ﭼﻴﺰي را ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ State wordﻣﻴﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ .ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪbe :
belong ، seem ، exist ،
ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ داري ﻓﺎﻋﻞ اﺳﺖ )ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﺎر( ﻣﺜﺎلJohn speaks English. :
در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ Johnﻓﺎﻋﻞ (subject) و speaks ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ
ﭼﻪ ﻫﺴﺖ: ﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻳﻳﺎ ﭼ
ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﻞﭼﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
ﻣﻲ ﻮﻳ ﻲ
Action: Renaldo plays football.
State: Owen seems kind.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ اي ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮرد ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼف دﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎت )ﺻﻔﺎت ،ﻗﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ ،ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ و (...
ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ دارﻧﺪ اﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻛﻪ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ داراي دو ﻧﻮع ﻣﻔﺮد و ﺟﻤﻊ )ﻫﻤﺮاه ( Sﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﻌﻞ ) to workﻛﺎر
ﻛﺮدن( داراي ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻜﻞ اﺳﺖ:
t
to work , work , worked , works , working
k k k d k ki
ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻓﻌﻞ 1
Active Voice and Passive Voice:
دو ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎص از ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آن voice ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ:
•Active voice
P i
Passive voice
• i
Active Voice
در اﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﺎ از active voice اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ و ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ (subject) ﻋﻤﻠﻲ را ﺑﺮ روي ﺷﻲء ﻳﺎ
ﻣﻔﻌﻮل )(objectاﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل:
Cat eats fish.
Cat: Subject or Active object.
j j
Eats: Verb
Fish: Passive object
در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﮔﺮﺑﻪ )ﻓﺎﻋﻞ( ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻮردن را ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﺎﻫﻲ )ﺷﻲء( اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ.
در Passive voice اﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺷﻲء ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ را از ﺷﻲء ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل:
Fish are eaten by cats.
Fi h S bj t A ti
Fish: Subject or Active object bj t
are :Auxiliary Verb
)eaten :main verb (past participle
7
by ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻔﻌﻮل از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ
cat :Passive object or Active subject
. ﺷﻲء اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ آن ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮدActive object :ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
Passive voice
:ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ
ﺳﺎده ﺎ ﺎPassive voice
ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺎ P i i ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر
ﺎ ﺎ
Subject +Auxiliary verb (be) + main verb (past participle)
. ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪhelping verb ﻫﻤﺎنauxiliary verb در ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻓﻮق ﻣﻨﻈﻮر از
:ﻳﺎد آوري
: ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( دو ﻫﺪف دارﻳﻢbe در ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود )ﻣﻲ داﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞbe ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ
make continuous tense ‐1
make continuous tense 1
make the passive ‐2
:ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ
ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺸﺎن دادن ﺗﺪاوم و ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ.1
ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺸﺎن دادن ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﭘﺬﻳﺮي آن.2
:ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل
8
:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪby ﻳﺎ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻔﻌﻮل از ﻟﻐﺖPassive object ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ
:ﺟﻤﻠﻪ زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
He was killed with a gun.
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﺮدﻳﻢ؟by ﭼﺮا در اﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ از
را اﻳﻔﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﻨﮓActive subject
A i bj ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺎنPassive object
P i bj ﻧﻘﺶgun ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ
: در اﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد.ﻧﺒﻮده ﻛﻪ او را ﻛﺸﺘﻪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺗﻔﻨﮓ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺨﺺ دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ
He was killed by somebody with a gun.
:Passive voice ﺻﺮف
infinitive to be washed
simple present It is washed.
past It was washed.
future It will be washed.
conditional It would be washed.
continuous present It is being washed.
past
p g
It was being washed.
future It will be being washed.
conditional It would be being washed.
perfect simple present It has been washed.
past It had been washed.
future It will have been washed.
conditional It would have been washed.
It would have been washed.
perfect continuous present It has been being washed.
past It had been being washed.
future It will have been being washed.
conditional It would have been being washed.
2 ﻓﻌﻞ
ﻨﺪي ﻓ ﻞ
ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي
ﺗﻘ
(Main Verbs) ( اﺻﻠﻲ وHelping Verbs) ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
:ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ دو دﺳﺘﻪ ﻋﻤﺪه ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ
(Helping Verbs) اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
(Main verbs) اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ
:ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜ
:ﻓﺮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ وارد اﺗﺎق ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺪه و ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ
I can .
People must .
9
The Earth will .
آﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻴﺰي ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ؟ آﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺗﻮاﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻗﻄﻌﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ .دﻟﻴﻠﺶ
اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻓﻌﺎل اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮدي ﺧﻮد ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ. اﻳﻦ اﻓﻌﺎل در ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ
ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﻬﻤﻲ را اﻳﻔﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ وﻟﻲ ﺧﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﭼﻴﺰي را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ.
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در
ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﺮدﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺎز دارﻧﺪ. در ﻛﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺣﺪود
دارد.
اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ وﺟﻮد ا
زﺑﺎن ا ﮕﻠ
ﻛﻤﻜﻲ در ﺎ
ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛ ﻜ
15ﻓ ﻞ
15
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ:
ﺣﺎل ﻓﺮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎن ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺠﺪدا وارد اﺗﺎق ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ:
I teach .
People eat .
The Earth rotates
The Earth rotates .
آﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﭼﻴﺰي ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ؟ آﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺗﻮاﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻛﻨﺪ؟ اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺑﻠﻲ وﻟﻲ ﻧﻪ زﻳﺎد .دﻟﻴﻠﺶ
اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻓﻌﺎل اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻮده و ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ و ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻲ را ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ .اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺰاران ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ دارﻳﻢ.
در زﻳﺮ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﺟﻤﻼت را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﻤﻼت داراي ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،اﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ
از آﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ دارﻧﺪ.
helping verb main verb
John likes coffee.
You lied to me.
They are happy.
The children are playing.
We must go now.
I do not want any.
11
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻛﻠﻲ:
Subject +can +main verb
ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺤﺒﺖ در ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﻳﻲ و اﻣﻜﺎن داﺷﺘﻦ:
She can drive a car.
ن:
ﻛﺮدن
درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺮ
ي ر ﻮﺑﺮاي
ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺮ
ل
Can you put the TV on.
Can you be quiet!
ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺮاي درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ اﺟﺎزه و ﻳﺎ اﺟﺎزه دادن:
?Can I smoke in this room
you can smoke in the room.
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻛﻨﻴﻢ: Could ﭼﻪ ﮕﺎ
ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ا ﺎ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻛﻛﻴﻔﻲ C ld ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛ ﻜ
ااز ﻓ ﻞ
ﺻﺤﺒﺖ در ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﻳﻲ و ﻳﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن داﺷﺘﻦ ﭼﻴﺰي در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ.
در ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻛﺮدن.
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻛﻠﻲ:
Subject +could + main verb
داﺷﺘﻦ ﭼﻴﺰي درر ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ:
ﻦ ن
ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﻳﻲ و ﻳﻳﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن
ﻣﻮرد ﻮ ﻳﻲ
ﺻﺤﺒﺖ درر ﻮر
ي ﺒ ﺑﺮاي
ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺮ
ل
I could swim when I was 5 years old.
My grandmother could speak seven languages.
?Could you understand what he was saying
ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺮاي درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻛﺮدن:
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ از could ﺟﻬﺖ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ از ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد .ﻛﻪ ﻣﺆدﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮ از can اﺳﺖ.
?Could you tell me where the bank is, Please
ld ll h h b k l ?
?Could you send me a catalogue, please
از ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ Have to ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ) :اﻟﺘﺰام ﺷﻬﻮدي(
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ ﺿﺮورت ﭼﻴﺰي را ﻧﺸﺎن ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ از اﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﻣﺜﺎل:
Children have to go to school.
Children have to go to school.
In France, you have to drive on the right.
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻛﻠﻲ:
)subject + auxiliary verb +have +infinitive (with to
ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ:
I do not have to see a doctor.
I have to see a doctor.
h d
I do have to see a doctor.
ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺮق ﺟﻤﻠﻪ دوم ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮم اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮم ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن دﻛﺘﺮ دارد.
12
از ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ Must ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ) :اﻟﺘﺰام ذﻫﻨﻲ(
ﻣﻨﻈﻮر از اﻟﺘﺰام ذﻫﻨﻲ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪه ﻻزم و ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ وﻟﻲ در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ از
Have to اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮدﻳﻢ ﻳﻚ اﻟﺘﺰام ﻛﻠﻲ و ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻮد.
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻛﻠﻲ:
subject +must +main verb
ﻣﺜﺎل::
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل
You must visit us soon.
I must call my mother tomorrow.
•ﭼﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم از Must not ﻳﺎ Mustn't اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺸﺎن دادن ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﭼﻴﺰي از اﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻛﻠﻲ:
subject +must not +main verb
ﻣﺜﺎل:
Passengers must not talk to the driver.
Policeman mustn't drink on duty.
)Visitors must not smoke. (present
I mustn'tt forget Tara
I mustn )forget Tara'ss Birthday. (future
)Birthday (future
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :از must not ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮاي زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد:
I couldn't park outside the parking.
We were not allowed to enter.
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ ):(Main Verbs
اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ
ﻲ ن ﻴ اﺻﻠﻲ درر زﺑزﺑﺎن
ﻞ ﻲ ن ﻓﻌﻞﻫﺰاران
ﻲ( .ﺰ ر
ل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
ﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼف اﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻲ
ﻳﻲ ررﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪه ﻣﻌﻨﺎ و ﻬﻮ
ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ
ﺧﻮد ﺑﺑﻪ ﻬ
ﻲ ﻮ ل اﺻﻠﻲ
اﻓﻌﺎل
وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮق ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻛﺮد:
.1اﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﺘﻌﺪي (Transitive) و ﻻزم ):(Intransitive
اﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﺘﻌﺪي ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲء ﺳﺮ و ﻛﺎر دارﻧﺪ وﻟﻲ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻻزم اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﺑﺴﻴﺎري از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻪ در آن ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪ ﻻزم و ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ speak
ﻣﺜﺎل:
T
Transitive:
ii
I saw an elephant.
We are watching TV.
He speaks English.
ﻫﻤﺎن ﻃﻮر ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﺘﻌﺪي ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲء اﺷﺎره ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ
ﻲ ﻳآﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ
ل ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺳﻮال ﺷﻮد ،I saw :اﻳﻦ
ﻳﻦ ﻮ ﻣﻲ ﻮ an elephant ررا ﺑﺮ رﻳﻢ
ﺑﺮدارﻳﻢ ﻲ p اول اﮔﺮﺮ
ل ولﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ درر ﻣﺜﺎل
ﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﻤﺎمم ﻣﻲ
ﺒﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ
ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰي را دﻳﺪم؟ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮرد را ﺑﺎ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اﺷﺘﺒﺎه ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ see ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎلI :
see ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺒﻴﻨﻢ .وﻟﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺴﺎزﻳﺪ.
13
2) Intransitive:
He has arrived.
John goes to school.
She speaks fast.
در ﻣﺜﺎل John goes to school ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ goes ﻣﺘﻌﺪي اﺳﺖ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ school اﺷﺎره ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ
John goes ﺑﺎز ﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺖ .ﭘﺲ ﻓﻌﻞ
ﻳﻌﻨﻲJohn goes : to school را ﺑﺮداﻳﻢ ﻳﻌﻨ
وﻟوﻟﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ to school
goes ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻزم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد.
.اﻓﻌﺎل ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪي ): (Linking Verbs
اﻓﻌﺎل ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪي ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺪارﻧﺪ و ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ و آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ درﺑﺎره ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ
اﻓﻌﺎل ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺴﺎوي ﺑﻮدن ،ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
ﻣﺜﺎل:
)Mary is a Teacher. (Mary =Teacher
)Tara is beautiful. (Tara =Beautiful
)The sky became dark (Sky > dark
.3اﻓﻌﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ و وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ):(Dynamic and Stative Verbs
ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎري را ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ اﻓﻌﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ .اﻳﻦ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ continuous
ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ tense ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎر روﻧﺪ .اﻓﻌﺎل وﺿﻌﻴﺘ
وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﮕﺮ وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ .اﻳﻦ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻧﻤ tense
continuous tense ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎر روﻧﺪ ،ﻣﮕﺮ در ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎص ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ در ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل از اﻓﻌﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲrun ،fight ،hit :
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل از اﻓﻌﺎل وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲappear ،hear ،impress ،love ،like :
.4اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﻗﺎﻋﺪه و ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه ):(Regular and irregular verbs
ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺮق ﺑﻴﻦ اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه و ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه اﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ در اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه ﺑﺮاي زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ (past tense) و اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮل
(past participle) ﺑﺎ "ed" ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ وﻟﻲ اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه در اﻳﻦ دو ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ و ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻧﺪ.
ﻟﻴﺴﺖ اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪه ):(Regular Verbs
در زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﺰاران ﻓﻌﻞ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ 600ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
14
• back • beg • boil • brake
• bake • behave • bolt • branch
• balance • belong • bomb • breathe
• ban • bleach • book • bruise
• bang • bless • bore • brush
• bare • blind • borrow • bubble
• bat • blink • bounce • bump
• bathe • blot • bow • burn
• battle • blush • box • bury
• beam • boast • brake • buzz
• question • queue
19
• undress • unite • unpack • use
• unfasten • unlock • untidy
• vanish • visit
• x‐ray
• yawn • yell
• zip • zoom
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ دارﻳﻢ در ﻣﻮرد آﻳﻨﺪه ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ و ﻫﻨﻮز ﺑﺎراﻧﻲ ﻧﺒﺎرﻳﺪه اﺳﺖ .وﻟﻲ ﻫﻮا اﺑﺮﻳﺴﺖ و ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺎﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺎ ااز willو ﻓ ﻞ
ﻓﻌﻞ در ﺎﻟﺖ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺎ
ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺘﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺿ ﺖ
ﻓﻮق ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ا
ﺟﺪول ﻓ ق
ل ﻫﻤﺎن ﻃﻃﻮر ﻛﻛﻪ در
ﺑﺒﺎرد .ﺎ
ﺑﺎران ﺎ
دارد ﺎ ا
اﻣﻜﺎن ا
ﻛﻛﻪ ا ﻜﺎ
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
22
IF condition result
present simple WILL +base verb
If I see Mary I will tell her.
If Tara is free tomorrow he will invite her.
If they do not pass their exam
they do not pass their exam their teacher will be sad
their teacher will be sad.
If it rains tomorrow will you stay at home?
If it rains tomorrow what will you do?
:ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي ﺟﺪول ﻓﻮق را ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اي دﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻴﺎن ﻛﺮد
result IF condition
WILL +base verb present simple
I will tell Mary if I see her.
He will invite Tara if she is free tomorrow.
Their teacher will be sad if they do not pass their exam.
Will you stay at home
Will you stay at home if it rains tomorrow?
it rains tomorrow?
What will you do if it rains tomorrow?
: ﻧﻴﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢmay و ﻳﺎShall ، Can از ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﭼﻮنWill ﮔﺎﻫﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
If you are good today, you can watch TV tonight.
:(Second Conditional)
(S d C diti l) ﺷﺮط
دوﻣﻴﻦ ﺷ ط
."ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪUnreal Possibility" ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮط "اﻣﻜﺎن ﻏﻴﺮ واﻗﻌﻲ" ﻳﺎ
. ﻣﺎ ﻫﻨﻮز ﺑﻪ آﻳﻨﺪه ﻣﻲ اﻧﺪﻳﺸﻴﻢ،دوﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺮط از ﺟﻬﺎﺗﻲ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ اوﻟﻴﻦ ﺷﺮط اﺳﺖ
.ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺧﺎص در آﻳﻨﺪه و ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ آن ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؟Unreal Possibility ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﺮا ﺑﻪ آن
.ص
ﻲ ﺧﺎص ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ
ﻣﮕﺮﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺮ ﻳ،ﻧﺪارد
وﺟﻮد ر
ﻴﻢ وﺟﻮ
اﻧﺪﻳﺸﻴﻢ
ﻣﻲ ﻳ ن ﻲﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺑﻪ آن
وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ
دادن و ﻴ
ن رخ ن واﻗﻌﻴﺖ اﻣﻜﺎن
زﻳﺮا درر و ﻴ
زﻳﺮ
آﻳﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮﻧﺪه ﺷﺪن ﺷﻤﺎ در ﺑﺨﺖ آزﻣﺎﻳﻲ وﺟﻮد. )ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮع ﺑﺨﺖ آزﻣﺎﻳﻲ( را ﻧﺪارﻳﺪLottery ﻓﺮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻠﻴﻂ
ﭘﺲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه ﺷﺪن در آﻳﻨﺪه ﻓﻜﺮ. ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪLottery وﻟﻲ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ در آﻳﻨﺪه ﻳﻚ ﺑﻠﻴﻂ. دارد؟ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ
. واﻗﻌﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ وﻟﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ. درﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ روﻳﺎ،ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
ﻫﻤﺎن ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺟﺪول ﻓﻮق ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻴﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ و در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ
.would ازwill ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي
IF condition result :ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺨ ﻠﻒ
دﻳﮕﺮ در دو ﺎﻟ
ﻣﺜﺎل ﮕ
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺜﺎل
past simple WOULD +base verb
If I won the lottery I would buy a car.
23
اﺳﺘﻔﺎدهMight وShould ،Could :از ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﭼﻮنWould ﮔﺎﻫﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
.ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
If I won a million dollars, I could stop working .
:(Third Conditional) ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺮط
."ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪno Possibility" ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮط "ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ" ﻳﺎ
ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ.اوﻟﻴﻦ و دوﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺮط در ﻣﻮرد آﻳﻨﺪه ﺑﻮدﻧﺪ وﻟﻲ ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺮط ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد
.ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ رخ ﻧﺪاده اﺳﺖ
ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؟no Possibility ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﺮا ﺑﻪ آن
.زﻳﺮا ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آن ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ رخ ﻧﺪاده و دﻳﮕﺮ وﻗﺖ آن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ
. )ﺑﺨﺖ آزﻣﺎﻳﻲ( ﺧﺮﻳﺪاري ﻛﺮدﻳﺪ وﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه ﻧﺸﺪﻳﺪLottery ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻠﻴﻂ
condition result
Past Perfect WOULD HAVE +Past Participle
If I had won the lottery I would have bought a car.
IF condition result
past simple
past simple WOULD +base verb
WOULD +base verb
If I married Mary I would be happy.
If Ram became rich she would marry him.
If it snowed next July would you be surprised?
If it snowed next July what would you do?
result IF condition
WOULD +base verb past simple
I would be happy if I married Mary.
She would marry Ram if he became rich.
Would you be surprised if it snowed next July?
What would you do if it snowed next July?
24
:(Conditional Zero)
(Conditional Zero) ﺷﺮط ﺻﻔﺮ
ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ،وﻗﺘﻲ از ﺷﺮط ﺻﻔﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ و درﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
ﭼﻪ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ؟. آﻧﻬﺎ در ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻪ اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻪ و ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻪ را داغ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﻘﺪاري ﻳﺦ ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ.ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ
: اﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮدﻳﺪ.ﻳﺦ ذوب ﺷﺪه و آب ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد
IF condition result
present simple
present simple present simple
present simple
If you heat ice it melts.
.ﻧﻜﺘﻪ اي ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮرد ﺷﺮط ﺻﻔﺮ ﻫﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺧﻮدش را دارد وﻻﻏﻴﺮ
.ﻧﻴﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪWhen ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ازIf ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي:ﺗﺬﻛﺮ
When I get up late, I miss my bus .
:ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
IF condition result
present simple present simple
If I miss the 8 o'clock bus I am late for work.
If I am late for work my boss gets angry.
y g gy
If people don't eat they get hungry.
If you heat ice does it melt?
result IF condition
present simple if present simple
I am late for work if I miss the 8 o'clock bus.
My boss gets angry if I am late for work.
People get hungry if they don't eat.
Does ice melt if you heat it?
:ﺷﺮﻃﻬﺎ
ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻃ ﺎ ﻼ
.در زﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮداري را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ در ﺗﺠﺴﻢ ﺷﺮﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ
Statement: He is German.
Question: Is he German?
2. Question Word Questions
26
question auxiliary verb subject main verb Answer
word Information
Wh
Where do
d you lilive?? I P i
In Paris.
When will we have lunch? At 1pm.
Who did she meet? She met Ram.
3. Choice Questions
h
27
ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎرمgoing to :
ﻗﺼﺪ ):(Intention
از ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر Going to ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺻﺤﺒﺖ در ﻣﻮرد آن ﻗﺼﺪ اﻧﺠﺎﻣﺶ را داﺷﺘﻪ
ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ.
ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻴ
ي زﻳﺮ ﻮﺟ
ل ﻫﺎي
ﺑﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل
I have won $1,000, I'm going to buy a new TV.
When are you going to go on holiday.
Mary is taking her music exam next year.
M i t ki h i t
They can't play tennis with you tomorrow, They're working.
We're going to the theatre on Friday.
28
زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده ﺑﺮاي زﻣﺎن ﺑﻨﺪي ):(Present Simple for schedule
اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻴﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ واﻗﻌﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ اﺗﻔﺎق ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼ در ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪول زﻣﺎن ﺑﻨﺪي( از
ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .اﺣﺘﻤﺎل رﺧﺪادن :ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ 100درﺻﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
The train leaves New York at 9pm tonight.
Tomorrow is Thursday.
h d
ﺧﻼﺻﻪ:
ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮدن ﺟﻤﻼت در اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ رﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ در ﻣﻮرد آﻳﻨﺪه ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ "دﻳﺪ" ﻣﺎ را ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ آﻳﻨﺪه ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ،
ﮔﺎﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ اﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎت ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﺎ را.
ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛ ﻚ
ﻛﻤﻚ ﺟﺪول ﺑﻪ ﺷ ﺎ
ل ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻛﻨﻴﺪ .ااﻳﻦ
ﺷﺪه ارا ﻼ ﻈ
ذﻛﺮ ﺷ
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎرﻫﺎي ذﻛ
ﻳﻚ ااز ﺎﺧﺘﺎ ﺎ
رﺧﺪاد ﻫﺮ ﻚ
اﺣﺘﻤﺎل ﺧ ا
ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ا ﺘ ﺎل
ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻃﻮر ﺗﻘ
ل در
ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻔﻬﻮم آﻳﻨﺪه ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
اﺣﺘﻤﺎل رﺧﺪاد واﻗﻌﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﺜﺎل
ﺻﺤﺒﺖ در ﻣﻮرد آن ﺑﻪ درﺻﺪ
29
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ:ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ
:(Gerunds) اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ
، )زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎلpreset participle آن ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺳﻤﻲ اﺳﺖ و ﻳﺎ،" ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮدing" وﻗﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺎ
(.ﻓﺮﻣﻲ از ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ
:ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮدGerunds
Gerunds دار ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ اﺳﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻing ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻓﻌﻞ
Fishing is fun .
. اﺳﺖpresent participle ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ،دار ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢing ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻓﻌﻞ
Anthony is Fishing .
I have a boring teacher .
.ﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢGerund در اﻳﻦ درس ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ داﺷﺖ ﺑﻪ روﺷﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ از
ﺷﻲء و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه،اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
:(Gerunds as Subject, Object or Complement)
: ﺷﻲء و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ اﺳﻤﻲ اﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﻤﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
Smoking costs a lot of money.
I don't like writing.
M f
My favorite occupation is reading.
i i i di
در اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻋﺒﺎرت.و ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺧﻮدش ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲء داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
: ﺷﻲء و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ،[ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞObject +Gerund]
Smoking cigarettes costs a lot of money.
I don't like writing letters.
My favorite occupation is reading detective stories.
My favorite occupation is reading detective stories.
:)واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‐ﺻﻔﺖ( ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪadjective ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ
The settling of debts.
His drinking of alcohol.
Pointless questioning.
A settling of debts (not settling debts.)
M ki "Ti i "
Making "Titanic " was expensive. i
The making of "Titanic" was expensive.
32
ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ :اﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي
اﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي )ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ ﻋﺎﻣﻪ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ(
):(Phrasal Verbs
اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﮔﺮوه ﺑﺰرﮔﻲ از اﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎم "اﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي" ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي اﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﻨﺪ
turn onو ﺎﻳﺎ
turn on ، pick up
ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪpick up :
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺎﻧﻨﺪ
ﺞ ﻣﻲ ﺎﺷﺪﺑﺴﻴﺎر اراﻳﺞ
ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪﻪ ﺎ
ﺧﺼﻮص ددر ﻜﺎﻟ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي ﺑﻪﻪ ﺧ
ﻛﻠ ﻪ
.get on withﺑﺴﻴﺎري از ﻣﺮدم ﺑﺮاي راﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ اﻧﻮاع اﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي ) Phrasal Verbsاﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ( ﻣﻲ
ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻳﻚ و ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﺖ دﻳﮕﺮ اﺳﺖ .ﻟﻐﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ آﻳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ
ﻗﻴﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ آن ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺖ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ Phrasal verbs ﻳﺎ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
get ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺳﺖget up ،ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺗﻨﺪ .ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﻚ
ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ،ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﮕﺮﻳﺴﺖ.
ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺜﺎل زﻳﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ،ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮع ﻓﻌﻞ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ دارﻳﻢ:
ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي look direct your eyes in a You must look before
اﻓﻌﺎل certain direction you leap.
ﭼﻨﺪﭼ p p
prepositional verbs look after take care of Who is looking after
g
اﻓﻌﺎل اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي ?the baby
در اﻳﻦ درس ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ داﺷﺖ ﺑﻪ اﻧﻮاع اﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي
اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ):(Phrasal Verbs
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ:
Verb + Adverb
Verb + Adverb
اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻻزم و ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪي ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
33
Phrasal verbs meaning examples
direct object
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﭘﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ؟. از آﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﺟﺪا ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ و ﺑﺮﺧﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
:ﺟﺪا ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ آن را ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ دﻳﺪlook up در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ
look (something) up
ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ آن را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮﻳﺎدداﺷﺖput off ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل ﻳﺎدﮔﻴﺮي ﻓﻌﻞ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪي ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ:ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد
:ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
put off (something\somebody)
34
:(Prepositional Verbs) اﻓﻌﺎل اﺿﺎﻓﻲ
:ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ اﻓﻌﺎل اﺿﺎﻓﻲ
Prepositional+Verb
ﺑﻪ. ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ اﻓﻌﺎل اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ داﺷﺖ،ﭼﻮن ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ داراي ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲء ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ
:ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
prepositional verbs meaning examples
direct object
believe in have faith in the I believe in God.
existence of
look after take care of He is looking after the dog.
talk about discuss Did you talk about me?
wait for await John is waiting for Mary.
: ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ را ﻳﺎد ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ آن را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد
believe in (something/somebody) :ﻣﺜﺎل
اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﺎد ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲء داﺷﺘﻪ و اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺟﺎي آن ﻧﻴﺰ
.ﻣﺸﺨﺺ اﺳﺖ
:(Phrasal‐Prepositional Verbs) اﻓﻌﺎل اﺿﺎﻓﻲ –ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻲ
:ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻛﻠﻲ
verb + preposition + Adverb
:ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
phrasal‐
phrasal meaning examples
prepositional verbs direct object
36
ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ :زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎ
زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه: زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل: زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ:
آﻳﻨﺪه ﺳﺎده ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده
آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ )(past
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ):(Past Continuous Tense
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري:
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ:
Subject + )auxiliary verb (BE + main verb
conjugated in simple past tense present participle
ﺻﺮف ﻓﻌﻞ در زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده
was base + ing
were
ﺑﺮاي ﺟ ﻼت
ﺟﻤﻼت not اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻣﻲ ﻛﻨ
ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﺑ اي اﺻﻠﻲ not
ﻛﻤﻜﻲ و ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠ
ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛ ﻜ
ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑ ﻦﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﻨﻔ
ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺟ ﻼت
ي ﺑ اي
اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
ددر زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘ ا
ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺎي ﻓﺎﻋﻞ و ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ را ﻋﻮض ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
subject auxiliary verb main verb
+ I was watching TV.
+ You were working hard.
- H h it
He, she, it was nott h l i
helping M
Mary.
- We were not joking.
؟ Were you Being ?silly
؟ Were they playing ?football
•ﭼﻄﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ از اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ،زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ را ﺑﻴﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ از زﻣﺎن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺮوع ﺷﺪه وﻟﻲ در آآن زﻣﺎن
اداﻣﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ .ﻓﺮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﻳﻚ روز ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ را از ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ،ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻇﻬﺮ ﺷﺮوع
ﺷﺪه ) (7pmو در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻇﻬﺮ ) (9pmﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ:
37
At 8pm yesterday, I was watching TV.
Past present future
8pm
ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮل
ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎي ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻮده اﻳﺪ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ داﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ درﺑﺎره ﭼﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ
ﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
I was working at 10pm last night.
They were not playing football at 9am this morning.
What were you doing at 8pm last night.
?What were you doing when he arrived
She was cooking when I telephoned her.
We were having dinner when it started to rain.
Ram went home early because it was snowing.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر روﻧﺪ.
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺮح ﺻﺤﻨﻪ از داﺳﺘﺎن )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد .ﺷﺮوع داﺳﺘﺎن ﻧﻴﺰ
اﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺷﺮوع ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد. ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
" James Bond was driving through town. It was raining. The wind was blowing
hard. Nobody was walking in the streets. Suddenly, Bond saw the killer in a
“telephone box...
ن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده: ري +ززﻣﺎن
اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
ﺮ ن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ
ززﻣﺎن
اﻏﻠﺐ اوﻗﺎت زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري را ﺑﺎ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ .از ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻴﺎن ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ
در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ و از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻴﺎن ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ رخ داده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
اﻳﻦ دو ﻋﻤﻞ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از when و ﻳﺎ while ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
در ﻣﺜﺎل زﻳﺮ دو ﻋﻤﻞ دارﻳﻢ:
1. long action: watching TV (expressed with past continuous tense).
2. short action: telephoned (expressed with simple past tense).
h i l h (d d ih i l )
past present future
ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ
I was watching TV at 8pm.
8pm
You telephoned at 8pm.
ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه
38
:ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﻢwhenh اﻳﻦ دو ﻋﻤﻞ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮدن
I was watching TV when you telephoned.
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ زﻧﮓ زدي ﻛﻪ. ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﻪ زﻣﺎن ﻧﻴﺰ اﺷﺎره ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪwhen )دﻗﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ
( ﺻﺒﺢ8 ﻣﻴﺸﻪ
:while وwhen ﻃﺮز اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از
when + short action (simple past tense).
when + short action (simple past tense).
while + long action (past continuous tense).
:اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪwhile وwhen در ﻛﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎر روش ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ از
ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﻤﻼت ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ.را اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢnot ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﻨﻔﻲ در اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اول
:ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎي ززﻳﺮ ﺗﺗﻮﺟﻪﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ
ﺑﻪﻪ ﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎ.ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨ
اول راا ﻋ ض
ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ا ل
ﻞﻛ ﻜﺟﺎي ﻓﺎﻋﻞ و ﻓﻓﻌﻞ
ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺎ
ﻛﺎﻓ ﺖ
subject auxiliary verb auxiliary verb main verb
+ I had been working.
+ You had been playing tennis.
‐ It had not been working well.
‐ We had not been expecting her
her.
? Had you been drinking?
? Had they been waiting long?
39
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ و ﻓﻌﻞ
.ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اول را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ
I had been I'd been
you had been you'd been
he had he'd been
she had been
h h db she'd been
h 'd b
it had been it'd been
we had been we'd been
they had been they'd been
:•ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوت ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺗﺮي در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ
:ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل. ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
Ram started waiting at 9am. I arrived at 11am. When I arrived, Ram had been waiting for
two hours.
waiting at 9am. I arrived at 11am. When I arrived, Ram had been waiting for two hours.
Ram had been waiting for two hours when I arrived.
past present future
Ram starts waiting in past
at 9am.
9 11
9 11
I arrive in past at 11am.
:در زﻳﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل دﻳﮕﺮ را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ
John was very tired. He had been running.
I could smell cigarettes Somebody had been smoking
I could smell cigarettes. Somebody had been smoking.
Had the pilot been drinking before the crash?
ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري را ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري داﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎوت ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ در
: ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺗﻔﺎق اﻓﺘﺎده
: رم ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ. را ﻣﻼﻗﺎت ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪRam دوﺳﺖ ﺧﻮد11 ﻓﺮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﺳﺎﻋﺖ
I am angry. I have been waiting for two hours.
:ﻓﺮدا ي آن روز ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ دوﺳﺘﺎن ﺧﻮد ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ
Ram was angry. He had been waiting for two hours.
40
:(Past Perfect Tense) زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
:•ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
:ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
conjugated in simple past tense past participle
had V3
اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ وnot ، و ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲhad ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ در زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
:ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎي ززﻳﺮﺮ ﻮ
ﺑﻪ ﻬ.ﻢ
ﻮض ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ
ﻞ ررا ﻋﻮض
ﻲ و ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
ﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
ﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﺎي ﻓﻌﻞ
ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ
ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﻤﻼت ﻮﺮ
subject auxiliary verb main verb
+ I had finished my work.
+ You had stopped before me.
‐ She had not gone to school.
‐ We had not left.
left
? Had you arrived?
? Had they eaten dinner?
:ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ و ﻓﺎﻋﻞ را ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ
I had I'd
you had you'd
he had he'd
she had she'd
it had it'd
we had we'd
they had they'd
ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲwe’d ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل. ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رودwould ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲhad ‘ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮd ﻧﻜﺘﻪ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ
:و ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ از روي ﻓﻌﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﭘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢWe would ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﻢhad We ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ
We had arrived (past participle)
We had arrived. (past participle)
We would arrive. (base)
41
:ﭼﻄﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ از اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
(past in ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ آن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ.زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻋﻤﻠﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
: ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل.ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪpast)
The train left at 9am. We arrived at 9:15am. When we arrived, the train had left.
The train had left when we arrived.
The train had left when we arrived
past present future
Train leaves in past at 9am.
9 9.15
We arrive in past at 9.15am.
You do not need the past
participle form to make the
simple past tense. It is shown
here for completeness only.
here for completeness only.
:ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﺜﺒﺖ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده
subject + main verb (base)
:ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﻨﻔﻲ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده
subject + auxiliary verb (did) + not + main verb (base)
:ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎدهه
ﻲ درر ﺬ
ﺳﺆاﻟﻲ
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎرر ﺟﻤﻼت ﺆا
auxiliary verb (did) + subject + main verb (base)
ﭼﻪ اول ﺷﺨﺺ،(و ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻤﻪ اﺷﺨﺎص ﭼﻪ ﺳﻮم ﺷﺨﺺis not conjugated) ﺻﺮﻓﻬﺎي ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﺪاردdid ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
.ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رودdid ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت... و
: ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪwork وgo ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ اﻓﻌﺎل اﺻﻠﻲ
subject auxiliary verb
auxiliary verb main verb
main verb
+ I went to school.
You worked very hard.
‐ She did not go with me.
We did not work Yesterday.
? Did you go to London?
to London?
Did they work at home?
43
ﻛﻪdid را ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼف ﻓﻌﻞbe to ﻣﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ.وﺟﻮد داردto be اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء! ﻳﻚ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﻞ
ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ.( we were, she|he| it, was ,you were ,I was). ﺻﺮف ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ،ﺻﺮف ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﺪ
اﺳﺘﻔﺎدهdid را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﻨﻔﻲ و ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ از ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲto be اﻳﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ
. و ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺟﺎي ﻓﻌﻞ و ﻓﺎﻋﻞ را ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻮض ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ،ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
subject main verb
+ I, he/she/it was here.
You, we, they were in London.
‐ I, he/she/it was not there.
You, we, they were not happy.
? Was I, he/she/it right?
Were you, we, they late?
The action is in the past.
:در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل از وﻗﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺪت را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
I lived in Bangkok for 10 years.
l d k kf
The Jurassic period lasted about 62 million years.
We did not sing at the concert.
Did you watch TV last night?
past present future
The action is in the past.
44
دﻗﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺻﻼ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ واﻗﻌﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻮده و ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮن ﺳﺎل ،ﻣﻬﻢ اﻳﻦ
اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﺪه .در زﻳﺮ ﻣﻮارد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
واﻗﻌﻪ اي ﻛﻪ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺗﻔﺎق اﻓﺘﺎده.
روﻳﺪادي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﺪه.
ﻣﺎ زﻣﺎن و ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎن رخ دادن واﻗﻌﻪ را ﻣﻲ داﻧﻴﻢ )و ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ(.
ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧ ﺎ
ﺳﺎده ا ﺘﻔﺎ
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺎ
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘ
ﺣﺘﻤﺎﺎ ﺎﺑﺎﻳﺪ ااز ﺎ
ﺣﺘﻤﺎ و ﺘ
ﺑﻴﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺘ ﺎرﺧﺪاد ارا ﺎ
زﻣﺎن ﺧ اﻣﻜﺎن و ﺎﻳﺎ ﺎ
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻛﻪ ﻜﺎ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﮕﺎ
ﻧﻜﺘ
و از ﻫﻴﭻ زﻣﺎن دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮان اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد.
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
He didn't like the movie.
I lived in that house when I was young.
?What did you eat for dinner
y
John drove to London on Monday.
Mary did not go to work yesterday.
We were not late. (for the train).
?Were you angry
ﮔﺎﻫﻲاﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮔﺎ
ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ اﻟ ﺘ
ﺳﺎده ارا ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎ
ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺎ
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘ
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺎ
ﻻ ﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻛﻨﻴﻢ،
داﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ارا ﺗﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻛﻪ ا ﺘﺎﻧ
ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻛﻪ ﮕﺎ
داﺷﺘﻪ ﺎﺷ
ﺗﺗﻮﺟﻪ اﺷﺘ
اوﻗﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻴﺎن ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻈﺮه )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت( از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﻧﻴﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .وﻟﻲ در ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮارد
زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ .ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﻪ داﺳﺘﺎن زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
"The wind was howling around the hotel [past continuous tense], and the rain
was pouring down. The door opened and James Bond entered. He took out his
, y
coat, witch was very wet and ordered a drink at the bar. He sat down at the
"corner of the lounge and quietly drank his...
اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ از زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎده وﺟﻮد دارد. ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل در ﺷﺮﻃﻬﺎ از اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺮاي اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ آﻳﻨﺪه
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد.
45
ﺣﺎل )(present
زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ):(Present Continuous Tense
در اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ اﻏﻠﺐ از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﻬﺎي زﻳﺎدي ﺑﺎ زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده
دارد ،ﭼﻪ در ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر و ﭼﻪ در ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد.
ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
ﻲ ﻮﻳ (pﻴﺰ
ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ )(progressive tense
g روﻧﺪه )
ن ﭘﻴﺶ رو (pززﻣﺎن
ري ))(present continuous اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
ﺮ ﺣﺎل
زﻣﺎن ل
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺑﺑﻪ ز ن
• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري:
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﭼﻨﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ:
)subject + auxiliary verb (be) + main verb (base + ing
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
The action is happening now.
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
زﻳﺮ ﻮ
ل ﻫﺎي ز ﺮ
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل
...the pages are turning. ...the candle is burning. ...the numbers are spinning.
.2ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل در ﺣﺎل وﻗﻮع اﺳﺖ )ﻗﺪري از ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ و آﻳﻨﺪه را ﻫﻢ درﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮ( دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ
ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﮕﻲ و ﻳﺎ در ﻓﻮاﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺷﻮد.
46
John is going out with Mary.
past present future
The action is happening
around now
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
Muriel is learning to drive.
I am leaving with my sister, until I find an apartment.
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻲ در آﻳﻨﺪه:
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺧﻮد )در زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري( ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ آﻳﻨﺪه ) (future wordﺑﻴﺎﻓﺰاﻳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ درﺑﺎره آﻳﻨﺪه ﻧﻴﺰ
weekk ، in juneو
i j ، tomorrow
t ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ، nextt :
ﻛﻠﻤﺎت آآﻳﻨﺪه ارا ااز روي ﻣﻔﻬﻮم آآﻧﻬﺎﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﻢ ،ﺎ
ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﻛﻠ ﺎ
...
ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ از ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺤﺒﺖ درﺑﺎره آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم آن
ﻋﻤﻞ را ﻛﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ) .ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﻛﺮده اﻳﻢ(
I am taking my exam next month.
past present future
!!!
A firm plan or The action is in the
program exists now. future.
47
اﻓﺰودن ingﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﺼﺪر(
ﻗﺎﻧﻮن work >‐‐ working
play >‐‐ playing
اﺻﻠﻲ
اﺻﻠ
assist >‐‐ assisting
see >‐‐ seeing
be >‐‐ being
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﺼﺪر( ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮف ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا +ﺣﺮف ﺻﺪادار ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪي +ﺣﺮف ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﻮد .ﺣﺮف آﺧﺮ را دوﺑﺎر
ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ
S t o p
stressed vowel
consonant consonant
)(vowels = a, e, i, o, u
stop >>‐‐ stopping
run >‐‐ running
اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء
begin >‐‐ beginning
اول ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﻴﻼب آﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪي ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء را ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد.
open >‐‐ opening
اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء دوم ﻴﻢ.
ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ آن yy ﻲ
ﻣﻲ ﻮﻳ ي نﺟﺎي
ﺷﻮد ﺑﺑﻪ ﺟ
ﻢ ﻮﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺑﻪ ie ﺧﺘﻢ
ﻞﭘﻳ ﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ
ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ
در ﻮر
ر
lie >‐‐ lying
die >‐‐ dying
اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺳﻮم اﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮف ﺻﺪادار +ﺣﺮف ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا e + ﺧﺘﻢ ﺷﻮدe ،را ﺣﺬف ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
come >‐‐ coming
mistake >‐‐ mistakingg
48
subject auxiliary auxiliary main verb
verb verb
+ I have been waiting for one hour.
+ You have been talking too much
‐ It has not been raining.
‐ We have not been playing football.
? Have you been seeing her?
? Have they been doing their homework?
:ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ
ﺒ،ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻴﻢ
ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻲ
ول ررا ﻼ
ﻲ اول
ﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ
ﻞ و ﻓﻌﻞ
ﺐ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ
اﻏﻠﺐ،ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
ﻲ ﻴﻢ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ
ري ﺒ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
ﺮ ل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
ﻞ ن ﺣﺎل
ﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺑﻪ ززﻣﺎن
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ
:اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ در ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ )ﻏﻴﺮ رﺳﻤﻲ( ﻧﻴﺰ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﻢ
I have been I've been
You have been You've been
He has been He's been
SShe has been
e as bee SShe's been
e s bee
It has been It's been
John has been John's been
The car has been The car's been
We have been We've been
They have been
y y
They've been
:در زﻳﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
I've been reading.
You've been talking too much.
:•ﭼﻄﻮر از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
:دارد
دوﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ر
زﻣﺎن و رﺑﺮ
ﻳﻦ ز نﻛﻠﻲ اﻳﻦ
ﻮر ﻲ ﺑﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر. دارد
ل ر ن ﺣﺎل
ﻲ ﺑﺑﺎ ززﻣﺎن
ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ر ﺒ
ن ﻮ ﻳﻦ ززﻣﺎن
اﻳﻦ
ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ اﻛﻨﻮن و ﻳﺎ اﺧﻴﺮا ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪه.1
(An action that has just stopped or recently stopped)
:ﻣﺎ درﺑﺎره ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮوع ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎزﮔﻲ و ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ اﺗﻤﺎم رﺳﻴﺪه
I'm tired because I've been running.
past present future
!!!
Recent action. Result now.
49
I'm tired [now], I've been running.
Why are the grasses wet [now]? Has it been raining?
You don't understand [now], because you haven't been listening.
A ti
Action started in past.
t t di t Action is continuing
A ti i ti i
now.
I've been reading for two hours. [ I'm still reading now]
We've been studying since 9 o'clock. [ We're still studying now]
How long have you been learning English? [ You are still learning now]
We have not been smoking. [ And we are not smoking now]
در ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﺪوده. ﺳﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ6 ﻫﻔﺘﻪ و ﻳﺎ2 ، دﻗﻴﻘﻪ5 : ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺤﺒﺖ درﺑﺎره ﺑﺎزه زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺜﻞfor ﻣﺎ از
.زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ
درﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻳﻚ. ﻳﻜﻢ ﺟﻮﻻي و ﻳﺎ روز دوﺷﻨﺒﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ، 9 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ: ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺤﺒﺖ درﺑﺎره ﺑﺎزه زﻣﺎن ﻣﺜﻞsince
i از
( )دﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي دارد.ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮوع در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ
for since
a period of time a point in past time
x‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐‐
20 minutes 6.15pm
three days Monday
6 months January
4 years 1994
2 centuries 1800
a long time I left school
ever the beginning of time
etc etc
50
:ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
I have been studying for 3 hours.
I have been watching TV since 7pm.
Tara hasn't been feeling well for 2 weeks.
Tara hasn't been visiting us since march.
He has been playing football for a long time
He has been playing football for a long time.
He has been living in New York since he left school.
. ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮدsince را در ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮد وﻟﻲfor ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ
. ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪpresent perfect progressive ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
:(Present Perfect Tense) زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
:• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
:ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ اﺳﺖ
subject + auxiliary verb (have) + main verb (past participle)
:ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل از اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
subject auxiliary verb main verb
+ I have seen ET.
+ You have eaten mine.
‐ She has not been to Rome.
‐ We have not played football.
? Have you finished?
? Have theyy done it?
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ 's ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ haveو ﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ beﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر
ﻣﻲ رود .ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل It's eatenﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان It has eaten و ﻫﻢ It is eatenﺑﺎﺷﺪ .اﻳﻦ دو
ﻣﻮﺿﻮع را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از روي ﻣﻔﻬﻮم ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪ.
• ﻛﻲ و ﭼﺮا از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
در اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ و ﺣﺎل وﺟﻮد دارد .ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد:
ﺗﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ )(experience
(experience)
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ )(change
وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ )در ﺣﺎل اداﻣﻪ( )(continuing situation
.1اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ:
ﻣﺎ اﻏﻠﺐ از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻴﺎن ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎﺗﻲ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﻛﺮده
ﻢ.
ن ررا ﺑﺪاﻧﻴﻢ
ﻢ اﻧﺠﺎمم و ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪمم اﻧﺠﺎمم آن
ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ
ﻲ ﻮﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ
ﻢ ﻬ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻴﻢ
اﻳﺪ ررا ﻬ
I have seen ET.
He has lived in Bangkok.
?Have you been there
We have never eaten caviar.
past present future
!!!
ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮده و از آن ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ذﻫﻨﻲ دارم
The action or state was in In my head, I have a memory
the past now
John has broken his leg.
past present future
+ ‐
وﻟﻲ اﻻن ﭘﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ دﻳﺮوز ﭘﺎي ﺟﺎن ﺧﻮب ﺑﻮد
52
?Has the price gone up
past present future
+ ‐
اﻣﺮوز ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺰار و ﻫﻔﺘﺼﺪ دﻳﺮوز ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺰار ﺗﻮﻣﻦ ﺑﻮد؟
ﺗ ﻨﻪ؟
ﺗﻮﻣﻨﻪ؟
The police have arrested the killer.
Past Present future
+ ‐
ﺷﻬﺮ ﻗﺪم ﻣﻣﻲ زد
دﻳﺮوز ﻗﺎﺗﻞ آزاداﻧﻪ ددر ﺷﻬ
دﻳ وز وﻟوﻟﻲ اﻻن ددر زﻧﺪان اﺳﺖ
وﺿﻌﻴﺖ و ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ رخ داده ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ اداﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﺮده اﻣﻜﺎن دارد در آﻳﻨﺪه ﻧﻴﺰ اداﻣﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
John drives a taxi.
past present future
It is John's job to drive a taxi. He does it every day. Past, present and future.
54
:• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر اﺻﻠﻲ
Subject + Auxiliary verb + Main verb *** ﻓﺎﻋﻞ+ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ+ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ
:ﺳﻪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻣﻬﻢ
. ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.1
.ﻴﻢ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻴs ﻲ
ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ و ﻳﻳﺎ ﺑﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞes ﻲ
ﻞ اﺻﻠﻲ ( ﺑﺑﻪ ﻞshe, it ,he) ﻣﻔﺮد
ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺺ ﺮﻮم ﺷﺨﺺي ﺳﻮم
ﺑﺮاي
ﺑﺮ.2
. ﻣﺎ از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﻨﻔﻲ و ﺳﻮالto be ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﻞ.3
55
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ to be و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮاي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ
اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي ﻓﻌﻞ to be در زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ :ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از آﻧﻬﺎ
ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ و ﺑﺮﺧﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ:
?Am I right
Tara is not at home.
You are happy.
past present future
I am not fat.
?Why are you so beautiful
Ram is tall.
past
p present
p Future
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ:
.1اﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ z,ss,s,X,sh,chو ﻳﺎ oﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ آﺧﺮﺷﺎن esاﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮد) .اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻮم ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮد(:
She watches TV
She watches TV.
.2اﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮف yﺧﺘﻢ ﺑﺸﻮد و ﻗﺒﻞ از yﻳﻚ ﺣﺮف ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ،ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻮم ﺷﺨﺺ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻔﺮد ﺣﺮف yدر اﻧﺘﻬﺎي
ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ iﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻪ آن esاﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ.
He studies.
.3در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺑﻮد ﻛﻪ از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده ﺑﺮاي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ و ﮔﺎﻫﺎ زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد .وﻟﻲ
ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل در ﺷﺮﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل ﺳﺎده ﺑﻪ آﻳﻨﺪه اﺷﺎره
ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
56
(future) آﻳﻨﺪه
:(Future Continuous Tense) زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
:• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
Subject
j + auxiliary verb WILL
y + auxiliary verb BE
y + main verb
ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﻤﻼت ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﺎي ﻓﺎﻋﻞ. اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢnot ﻳﻚbe وwill ﺑﻴﻦ، ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ
: ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. را ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﻢwill و
subject auxiliary auxiliary main verb
verb verb
+ I will be working at 10am.
at 10am
+ You will be lying on a beach
tomorrow.
‐ She will not be using the car.
‐ We will not be having dinner at home.
? Will you be playing football?
? Will they be watching TV?
: را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺧﺘﺼﺎري ﺑﻴﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢwill ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮرد زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ اﻏﻠﺐ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ و
I will I'll
you will you'll
he will he'll
she will she'll
it will
it will it'llll
it
we will we'll
they will they'll
57
I will not I won't
you will not
ill you won't'
he will not he won't راnot وwill ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﻨﻔﻲ
she will not she won't ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻣﻲwon’t ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ
it will not it won't :ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
we will not we won't
th
they will not
ill t th
they won't 't
. we وI ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮص ﺑﺮاي. اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢwill ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎيshall ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ از:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
:• ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ از زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
ﻗﺒﻞ از آن ﻟﺤﻈﻪ اي ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻮردش، ﻋﻤﻞ.زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ در ﻟﺤﻈﻪ اي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ در آﻳﻨﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
: ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺷﺮوع ﺷﺪه وﻟﻲ در آن ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ
Tomorrow I will start work at 2pm and stop work at 6pm
Tomorrow I will start work at 2pm and stop work at 6pm.
At 4pm tomorrow, I will be working.
past present future
4pm
At 4pm, I will be in the
middle of working.
iddl f ki
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اي را در زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﻴﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﺪاﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ در ﻣﻮرد ﭼﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ در
:آﻳﻨﺪه ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
I will be playing tennis at 10am tomorrow.
They won't be watching TV at 9pm tonight.
What will you be doing at 10 pm tonight?
What will you be doing when I arrive? [tomorrow]?
She will not be sleeping when you telephone her.
We will be having dinner when the film starts.
Take your umbrella, it will be raining when you return.
:(Future Perfect Continuous Tense) زﻣﺎن آآﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
:• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
subject + auxiliary verb + auxiliary verb + auxiliary + main verb
WILL HAVE verb BE
invariable invariable past present
participle participle
را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲwill ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اي را ﺑﻪ زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﻴﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ اﻏﻠﺐ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ و
:ﮔﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ
I will I'll
you will you'll
he will he'll
she will she'll
it will
it will it'llll
it
we will we'll
they will they'll
II will not
will not II won
won'tt
you will not you won't
he will not he won't
she will not she won't
it will not it won't
we will not
we will not we won'tt
we won
they will not they won't
59
:•ﭼﻄﻮر از زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎي.از اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺮاي ﺻﺤﺒﺖ درﺑﺎره ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ در آﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
:ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
I will have been working here for ten years next week.
He will be tired when he arrives. He will have been travelling for 24 hours.
را ﺧﻼﺻﻪhave وwill ، و ﺑﺮﺧﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﻓﺎﻋﻞwill وﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اي را ﺑﻪ زﻣﺎن آﻳﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎن ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﮔﺎﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ و
:ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ
II will have
will have I ll have
I'll have I ll ve
I'll've
you will have you'll have you'll've
he will have he'll have he'll've
she will have she'll have she'll've
it will have it'll have it'll've
we will have
we will have we'llll have
we have we'll've
we ll ve
they will have they'll have they'll've
You arrive in future at 9.15am.
63
ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ :اﺳﻢ
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ:
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ ﻛﺎر دﺷﻮاري ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ،اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ اﺷﻴﺎء و اﺳﺒﺎب ) (thingsو اﻓﻌﺎل اﻋﻤﻞ و ﻛﺎر ﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﻣﺜﻞ
) foodﻏﺬا( ،ﻏﺬا ﭼﻴﺰي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﺨﻮرﻳﻢ ﭘﺲ اﺳﻢ اﺳﺖ .ﻳﺎ ) Happinessﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻟﻲ( ﭼﻴﺰي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ آن
ن( ،ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴﺰي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻮدن ﻢ اﺳﺖ و ﻳﻳﺎ ) Human beinggن
اﻧﺴﺎن ﺑﻮ Happinessﻧﻴﺰ
ﻴﺰ اﺳﻢ pp ﻴﻢ ﭘﺲ
ﻣﻴﺨﻮاﻫﻴﻢ
ررا ﻴ ﻮ
ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ.
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ:
در ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺳﺎده اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ اﺷﺨﺎص ،ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ و ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
Person : man, woman, teacher, Mary, John.
Place : home, office, town, country, America, mosque ...
thi
thing : table, car, banana, money, music, love, dog, monkey.
t bl b i l d k
اﻳﺮادي ﻛﻪ در ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻮق وﺟﻮد دارد اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ loveدر آن ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻨﺠﺪ .ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد اﻳﻨﻜﻪ loveﻫﻢ اﺳﻢ ،و
ﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ اﺳﺖ.
ﻳﻚ راه )ﻛﻤﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪه ﺗﺮ( دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﺳﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ:
ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﺎﻳﺎن آن (it’s Ending)
(position)
(p ن )ﻗﺮارﮔﻴﺮي آن
ﻞ ﺮ ر ﻴﺮي ﻣﺤﻞ
وﻇﻴﻔﻪ )ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد( آن (Functions)
•ﭘﺎﻳﺎن اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ ):(Noun Endings
ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻠﻤﻪ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه اﺳﻢ ﺑﻮدن ان ﻟﻐﺖ اﺳﺖ:
ity > nationality
ment > management
ness > happiness
h i
ation > relation
hood > childhood
اﻟﺒﺘﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺣﺮوف ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل spoonful :ﺑﺎ fulﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻴﺸﻮد در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ
ﺻﻔﺖ carefulﻧﻴﺰ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ.
ﻢ ﻫﺎ ):(Position in Sentence ﻗﺮارﮔﻴﺮي اﺳﻢ
ﻞ ﺮ ر ﻴﺮي •ﻣﺤﻞ
در اﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻮارد ﻣﻴﺘﻮان از روي ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ در ﺟﻤﻠﻪ دارد آن را ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ داد.
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ اﺷﺎره (determiner) ﻣﻲ آﻳﻨﺪ ،ﺻﻔﺖ اﺷﺎره ﻣﺜﻞ such ،my ،this ،that ،a ،an :و ...
a relief
an afternoon
the doctor
thi
this word d
my house
such stupidity
64
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻳﻚ و ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ آﻳﻨﺪ:
a great relief
a peaceful afternoon
the tall, Indian doctor
this difficult word
]my brown and white house [my brown white house
b d h h [ b h h ]
such crass stupidity
•وﻇﻴﻔﻪ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ ):(Functions
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ وﻇﻴﻔﻪ اي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ در ﺟﻤﻠﻪ دارﻧﺪ:
subject of verb : Doctors work hard.
object of verb : He likes coffee.
object of verb : He likes coffee.
subject and object of verb : teachers teach students.
ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ (subject) و ﻫﺪف ) (objectدر ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ اﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ) (pronounو ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرت
) (phraseﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ phrase .ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮوﻫﻲ از ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي واﺣﺪي داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ run down :ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ
phrasal verbاﺳﺖ .در ﺟﻤﻠﻪ:
، my doctor works hardاﺳﻢ doctorوﻟﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ my doctorﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ.
65
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﻤﺎرا ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻔﺮد ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮاه آن ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ:
my ،this ،the ،aو ...ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ.
)I want an orange. (not I want orange
)Where is my bottle? (not where is bottle
وﻟﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺳﻤﻲ ﺷﻤﺎرا ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﻓﻮق ﻧﺒﻮده و ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده
ااﺳﺖ:
I like oranges.
Bottles can break.
ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎرا ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ از someو ﻳﺎ anyاﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ:
I've got some dollars.
y g
?Have you got any penyp
ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ از a few و ﻳﺎ manyﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎرا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
I've got a few dollars.
I haven't got many pens.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ people :ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﻣﺮدم ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ ﺷﻤﺎرا اﺳﺖ .و ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻟﻐﺖ personﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺮدم را ﺑﺸﻤﺎرﻳﻢ:
There is one person here.
Th
There is three people here.
i th l h
• اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا:
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺎده ،ﻣﻔﻬﻮم و ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰ دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ آن را ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺰا
ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ )ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺸﻤﺎرﻳﻢ( .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل ﻣﺎ ﺷﻴﺮ (milk) را ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺸﻤﺎرﻳﻢ .وﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮي ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﺮ
(bottles of milk) ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا اﺳﺖ .در زﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎل از اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
, , , pp
music, art, love, happiness.
advice, information, news.
furniture, luggage.
rice, sugar, butter, water.
electricity, gas, power.
money, currency.
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻔﺮد رﻓﺘﺎر ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ .از ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺮد ﻧﻴﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ:
This news is very important.
your luggage looks heavy.
ﻮﻳﻴﻢ"an :
ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ
ﻣﺜﺎل ﻴ ﻮ ﻴﻢ
ن ل ﻋﻨﻮان
ﻴﻢ .ﺑﺑﻪ ﻮ ﻧﻜﺮه aو anاﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻲ
ﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺣﺮوف ﺮ
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ازز ﺮو
ﺷﻤﺎرا ﻮ
ﺑﻞ ر
ﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ
ي ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻢ ﻫﺎي
ي اﺳﻢ
ﺑﺮاي
ﺑﺮ
information" ﻳﺎ "a news " وﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖa something of :اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ:
a piece of news.
a bottle of water.
a grain of rice. 66
. را ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢany وsome
I've got some money.
Have you got any rice?
: ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدmuch وa little از
I've got a little money.
Ih
I haven't got much rice.
't t h i
. )اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻤﻌﻲ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮدmass nouns ﺑﻪ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
:• اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺷﻤﺎرا و ﻫﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ
. اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي در ﻣﻌﻨﻲ.ﮔﺎﻫﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺷﻤﺎرا و ﻫﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
Countable Uncountable
There are two hairs in my coffee! hair I don't have much hair.
There are two lights in our bedroom. light Close the curtain. There's too much light!
( ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎرا ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ وﻟﻲ ﮔﺮ دارﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﻮان آب و ﻳﺎ ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﻴﺪﻧﻲ ﻓﻜﺮ... ﻗﻬﻮه و، ﻧﻮﺷﻴﺪﻧﻲ ﻫﺎ )آب:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
(رﺳﺘﻮران
ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ )ﻣﺜﻼ ددر ﺳﺘﻮ ان
ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳ ﻢ
ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﻣ ﺘﻮاﻧ ﻢ
ﻣ ﻜﻨ ﻢ
Two teas and one coffee please.
67
common noun proper noun
man, boy John
woman, girl Mary
country, town England, London
company Ford, Sony
shop restaurant
shop, restaurant Maceys McDonalds
Maceys, McDonalds
month, day of the week January, Sunday
book, film War & Peace, Titanic
:• ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺣﺮوف ﺑﺰرگ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ
روز ﻫﺎي، ﻛﻤﭙﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺎ، اﻣﺎﻛﻦ، و اﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ اﺳﻢ اﺷﺨﺎص.ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺣﺮف اول اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ را ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮوف ﺑﺰرگ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ
: ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.ﻫﻔﺘﻪ و ﻣﺎه ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
They like John.
I live in England.
She works for Sony.
The last day in January is a Monday.
We saw Titanic in the Odeon Cinema
: The
h • اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺪون
: ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل. اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢThe ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺎم اﺷﺨﺎص از ﺣﺮف ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
first names Bill (not *the Bill)
Hilary
surnames Gates
Clinton
full names Bill Gates
68
: ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪThe ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ
towns Washington (not *the Washington), Paris, Tokyo
states, regions Texas, Kent, Eastern Europe
countries England, Italy, Brazil
continents Asia Europe North America
Asia, Europe, North America
islands Corsica
mountains Everest
ﺑﻜﺎرThe آن را ﺑﺎ، ﺑﺎﺷﺪrepublic و ﻳﺎstates ،kingdom در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎم ﻛﺸﻮري داراي ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻛﻠﻤﺎت:اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء
:ﻣﻴﺒﺮﻳﻢ
states the United States, the US, the United States of America, the USA
kingdom the United Kingdom, the UK
republic the French Republic
. اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢThe
Th ﻗﺮار ﮔﮔﻴﺮد از... وPresident
P id ،Doctor
D ،Mr
M ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﺎم ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻟﻐﺎت
the president, the king President Bush (not *the President Bush)
the captain, the detective Captain Kirk, Detective Colombo
the doctor, the professor Doctor Well, Dr Well, Professor Dolittle
my uncle, your aunt Uncle Jack, Aunt Jill
Mr, Mrs, Miss Mr Gates (not *the Mr Gates), Mrs Clinton, Miss Black
. را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮدThe ، ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ اﺳﻢ درﻳﺎﭼﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮه ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪMount و ﻳﺎLake در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ
the lake Lake Victoria
the mount Mount Everest
:ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
We live beside Lake Victoria. We have a fantastic view across the lake.
69
The ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از... ﭘﺎرك ﻫﺎ و، ﭼﻬﺎر راه ﻫﺎ، ﻣﻴﺎدﻳﻦ، ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن ﻫﺎ،ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎ
:اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد
streets etc Oxford Street, Trenholme Road, Fifth Avenue
squares etc Trafalgar Square, Oundle Place, Piccadilly Circus
parks etc
parks etc Central Park Kew Gardens
Central Park, Kew Gardens
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪKennedy Airport اﺳﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن ﻫﺎ و اﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ از دو و ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ
. را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢThe در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮف،ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اول ﻧﺎم ﺷﺨﺺ و ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
people Kennedy Airport, Alexander Palace, St Paul’s Cathedral
places Heathrow Airport Waterloo Station Edinburgh Castle
Heathrow Airport, Waterloo Station, Edinburgh Castle
: اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢThe درﻳﺎﻫﺎ و اﻗﻴﺎﻧﻮس ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ از، ﻛﻮه ﻫﺎ، رودﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ،(canals) ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﻢ آﺑﺮاﻫﻬﺎ
canals the Suez Canal
the Suez Canal
rivers the River Nile, the Nile
seas the Mediterranean Sea, the Mediterranean
oceans the Pacific Ocean, the Pacific
ا ﻔﺎThe
:اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻛﻨﻴﻢ Th اﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ااز
اﺷﺨﺎص و ا ﺎﻛ
اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ا ﺨﺎ
ﺑﺮاي ا ﺎ
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ا
ﻻ
people (families, for example) the Clintons
countries the Philippines, the United States
island groups
island groups the Virgin Islands the British Isles
the Virgin Islands, the British Isles
mountain ranges the Himalayas, the Alps
70
:ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼت زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
I saw the Clintons today, It was Bill's birthday.
Trinidad is the largest island in the West Indies.
Mount Everest is in the Himalaya.
: اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢThe ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺑﺮاي اﻧﻮاع اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ از
hotels, restaurants the Ritz Hotel, the Peking Restaurant
banks the National Westminster Bank
cinemas, theatres the Royal Theatre, the ABC Cinema
museums the British Museum, the National Gallery
buildings the White House, the Crystal Palace
newspapers the Daily Telegraph, the Sunday Post
organisations the United Nations, the BBC, the European Union
: اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢThe درﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ازof ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ
The Tower of London.
The Tower of London
The Gulf of Fars.
The London School of Economics.
The Bank of France.
The Statue of Liberty.
one ball more than one ball
one boy the boy's ball the boy's balls
more than one boy the boys' ball the boys' balls
:اﻳﻦ ﻧﺤﻮه ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ ﻋﺒﺎرت ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻜﺎر رود
The man next door's mother ( The mother of the man next door )
The Queen of England's dogs.
71
اﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ از ofﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد وﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدن آﭘﺴﺘﺮوف اس “ ‘s “ ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ.
The books of my sister
My sister's book
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ )ﻧﺎم ﻫﺎ(
در ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ از ‘sﺑﺮاي اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
' Thi i M
This is Mary's car.
?Where is Ram's telephone
?Who took Anthony's pen
I like Tara's hair.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎ sﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎ آن ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮد رﻓﺘﺎر ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ:
This is Charles's chair.
s s C a es s c a .
اﻟﺒﺘﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ آﭘﺴﺘﺮوف “ ‘ “ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ) .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ و ﻣﻌﺮوف اﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر
ﻣﻲ رود(.
?Who was Jesus' father
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﺪه:
ﻢ: س “ ‘s “ اﻳﻦ
ﻦ ﻛﺎرر ررا ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ آﭘﺴﺘﺮوف اس
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ازز ﭘ ﺮو
ﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﺪه ﻮ
ﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻲ
ن ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ اﺳﻢن دادن
ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺸﺎن
ﺮ
singular noun plural noun
my child's dog my children's dog
the man's work the men's work
the mouse's cage the mice's cage
a person's clothes people's clothes
72
ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﻢ :ﺻﻔﺖ
ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎ ): (Adjectives
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي در ﻣﻮرد اﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ .ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر
ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد .ﻣﺜﻞ I like Chinese food :و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺑﺮﺧﻲ اﻓﻌﺎل . It is hard :ﻧﻜﺘﻪ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﺶ از
A beautiful young French lady
y g ﻢ ﺑﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرر ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢy :
ي ﻳﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ
ﺑﺮاي
ﻳﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ررا ﺑﺮ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ،ﮔﺎﻫﺎ دﺷﻤﻦ اﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ از اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎد دﻗﻴﻖ )اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮد ﻫﻤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻻزم
را در ﺑﺮ دارﻧﺪ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﺪارﻳﻢ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي ﮔﻔﺘﻦ
A large Impressive, houseﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ .A mansion
ﺻﻔﺎت اﺷﺎره ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ):(Determiners
ﺻﻔﺎت اﺷﺎره ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ از ﻗﺒﻴﻞ .the, an, my, some :از ﻟﺤﺎظ ﮔﺮاﻣﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ در اﺑﺘﺪاي ﻳﻚ
ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮد.
ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎ
ا اﺷﺎره
ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ا ﺎ
ﻓﻘﻂ ﻚ
ﻋﺒﺎرت ااﺳﻤﻲ ﻓ ﻂﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ااﺳﻢ ﺎﻳﺎ ﺎ
ل ا ﻋﺒﺎرت ااﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻲ آآﻳﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻃﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ااﺳﻢ ﺎﻳﺎ ﺎ
ﺣﺮوف ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ):(Article
the ,a, an
ﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﻠﻜﻲ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ( ﻳﺎ ):(Possessive Adjectives
their ,my, you, his, her, our
اﺷﺎره:
ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺎت ر ﻳﺮ
every ,each
neither ,either
no ,any, some
most ,much, many, more
least ,little, less
f
fewest ,few, fewer
f f
whichever ,what, whatever, which
all ,both, half
several
enough
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ An ، Aو ﻳﻳﺎ The ﺣﺮوف ﺮﻳ • ﺮو
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ :ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه (Determiner) ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ را ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻮق ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎن اﺻﻠﻲ:
)(Determiners are adjective or modifier that limits a noun
ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ a dog و ﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ the dog ؟ ﺑﻪ a ،anو theﺣﺮوف ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ) (articlesﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ .آﻧﻬﺎ را
ﺑﻪ دو ﮔﺮوه ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻪ ) (definiteو ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻜﺮه ) (Indefiniteﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
Articles
Definite Indefinite
the a, an
73
را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ و وﻗﺘﻲ در ﻣﻮردThe ،وﻗﺘﻲ دارﻳﻢ در ﻣﻮرد ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺧﺎص ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
. را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢan و ﻳﺎa ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ
ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ. در آﺳﻤﺎن ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎه و ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﺎره وﺟﻮد دارد.ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل آﺳﻤﺎن را در ﺷﺐ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ
:ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ
I saw the moon last night.
I saw a star last night
I saw a star last night.
:ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
the a, an
The capital of France is Paris. I was born in a town.
I have found the book that I lost. John had an omelette for lunch.
Have you cleaned the car?
Have you cleaned the car? James Bond ordered a drink
James Bond ordered a drink.
There are six eggs in the fridge. We want to buy an umbrella.
Please switch off the TV when you finish. Have you got a pen?
و اﻳﻨﻜﻪ از ﻛﺪام ﺣﺮف ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ. را ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢan وthe ،a ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ
:ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
زﻳﺮﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ
ﻣﺜﺎل ز ﺗ ﻪ
ﺑﻪ ﺜﺎل
ﻪ.ﻛﻠﻤﻪ
ﺧﻮد ﻛﻠ ﻪ
دارد و ﻧﻪ ﺧ د
ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دا د
ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺘﮕ
ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﻠ ﻪ
ﺖو ﻗ ﺖ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪﻪ ﺿاﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨ
ﻧﻈﺮ ا ﺘﻔﺎد
ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻮردد ﻧﻈ
ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻠ ﻪ
ا
( ﭼﺘﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ را در ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﺪارﻳﻢ،)ﻫﺮ ﭼﺘﺮيWe want to buy an umbrella.
))ﻣﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺘﺮ دارﻳﻢ و ﺑﻪ دﻧﺒﺎل آن ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻳﻢWhere is the umbrella?
.ﻛﻤﻚ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮدan وthe ،a اﻳﻦ داﺳﺘﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ در درك ﻣﻔﻬﻮم ﺑﻜﺎرﮔﻴﺮي،داﺳﺘﺎن ﻛﻮﺗﺎه زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ
A man and a woman were walking in Oxford Street. The woman saw a dress that she liked
in a shop. She asked the man if he could buy the dress for her. He said: "Do you think the
shop will accept a cheque? I don't have a credit card."
: Every وEach •
ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﻫﺮﻛﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮرeach . ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ دارﻧﺪ اﻟﺒﺘﻪ در ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﺗﻔﺎوتevery وeach
: ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺲ و ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ )ﻛﺠﺎ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪevery ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ اﺳﺖ وﻟﻲ
Every artist is sensitive.
Each artist sees things differently
Each artist sees things differently.
Every soldier saluted as the President arrived.
The President gave each soldier a medal.
: ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رودeach
The soldiers each received a medal.
: ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رودof ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاهeach
The president spoke to each of the soldiers.
He gave a medal to each of them.
: اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدeach ﺑﺮاي دو ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از. را ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮاي دو ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮدevery
He was carrying a suitcase in each hand. 74
: را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ روﻳﺪاد ﭼﻘﺪر اﺗﻔﺎق ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪevery
There is a plane to Bangkog every day.
The bus leaves every hour.
. ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻔﺮد ﺻﺮف ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ، ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪevery وeach اﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
: Any وSome•
ﻋﺪد ﻛﻮﭼﻚ و ﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﻢ، = ﻳﻚ ﻛﻢSome
. ﻳﻚ ﻛﻢ و ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ، = ﻳﻜﻲAny
. در ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﻨﻔﻲ و ﺳﺆاﻟﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢAny در ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﺜﺒﺖ و ازSome ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ از
some any example situation
+ I have some I have $10.
money.
‐ I don't have any I don't have $1 and I don't have $10 and I
money. don't have $1,000,000. I have $0.
? Do you have any Do you have $1 or $10 or $1,000,000?
money?
)ﻣﻨﻈﻮر. اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢAny وSome ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪSomebody\Anybody وSomething\Anything در ﻛﻞ از:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
(. ﻣﺜﺒﺖ و ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ،ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮدن در ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﻨﻔﻲ
:ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
He needs some stamps.
I must go. I have some homework to do.
II'm
m thirsty. I want something to drink.
thirsty I want something to drink
I can see somebody coming.
He doesn't need any stamps.
I can stay. I don't have any homework to do.
I'm not thirsty. I don't want anything to drink.
I can't see anybody coming.
Does he need any stamps?
Do you have any homework to do?
Do you want anything to drink?
Can you see anybody coming?
: ﺗﻨﻬﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ در ﺟﻤﻼت ﻣﺜﺒﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﻛﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪAny از
I refused to give them any money ( I did not give them any money)
I refused to give them any money. ( I did not give them any money)
She finished the test without any difficulty. ( She did not have any difficulty)
اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺟﻮاب ﻣﺜﺒﺘﻲ را از ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻤﺎن. در ﺟﻤﻼت ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢSome ﺑﺮﺧﻲ اوﻗﺎت از
( )ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ واﻗﻌﺎ ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻮاب را ﻣﻴﺪاﻧﻴﻢ:دارﻳﻢ
75
?Would you like some more tea
y
?Could I have some sugar please
(Adjective before nouns
j ﻢ) : • ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ
ﺒﻞ ازز اﺳﻢ
ﮔﺎﻫﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺖ را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻳﻚ اﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ:
I like big black dogs.
She was wearing a beautiful long red dress.
ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮارﮔﻴﺮي ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﻢ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟
درﻛﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ .1 :ﻧﻈﺮ و ﻋﻘﻴﺪه )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ زﻳﺒﺎ ،زﺷﺖ و .2 (...ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ،آﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ و(...
):(Opinion
ﻋﻘﻴﺪه ) (O i i ﻧﻈﺮ و ﻘ
.1ﻈ
She has a nice French car.
.2ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ):(Fact
She has a nice French car.
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺻﻔﺎت ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد:
)((origin
اﺻﻠﻴﺖ ) g
ﺟﻨﺴﻴﺖ )) ((materialو ﻴ ) ، ((shapeررﻧﮓ )) ، ((colorﺟ ﻴ
ﻞ) p) ، ((ageﺷﻜﻞ
ﻃﻮل ﻋﻤﺮﺮ ) g
،((size) ﻮل
اﻧﺪازه )
ز
A big, old, square, brown, wooden Chinese table.
ﺻﻔﺎت اﺷﺎره )ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه( ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ اﮔﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .در زﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺎت اﺷﺎره را
ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
ﺻﻔﺎت ﺣﺮف ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ):(article adjectives
A Th
A , The
ﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ): (possessive adjectives
my, your,....
ﺻﻔﺎت اﺷﺎره ):(demonstrative adjectives
this, that
:(q
)(quantifier adjectives
j ﻲ)ﺻﻔﺎت ﻛﻤﻲ
some, any, few, many
اﻋﺪاد ):(numbers
one, two,...
76
:ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل زﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ اﺷﺎره دارد و ﻫﻢ ﺻﻔﺎت ﻧﻈﺮي و ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
adjectives noun
determiner opinion fact
age shape colour
two nice old round red candles
: ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢand ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ دو ﺻﻔﺖ رﻧﮓ را ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎ
Many newspapers are black and white.
She was wearing a long blue an yellow dress.
ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺸﺎن دادن ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ، ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﻮد وﻟﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﮕﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
: ﺑﻪ دو ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ
:ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ اول
A: " I want to buy a round table. "
B: " Do you want a new round table or an old round table? "
:ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ دوم
A: " I want to buy an old table. "
B: " Do you want a round old table or a square old table? ”
" d ld bl ld bl ”
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :درﺳﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ اي ﺗﻨﻬﺎ دوﭼﻴﺰ را ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،اﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دو ﭼﻴﺰ
ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ دو ﮔﺮوه )ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮوه ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺪاد زﻳﺎدي ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ:
ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮوه.
ﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭼ ﻲ ﺷﻮد .ﻳﻌﻨﻲ
ﻦ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻛﻮه اورﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﻫﻬﺎي دﻧﻴﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ
در اﻳﻦ
Mt Everest is higher than all other mountains.
A B C
A is the biggest.
ﺑﺮﺗﺮﺮ: • ﺮﻳ
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮ
ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ اي دو راه ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ وﺟﻮد دارد:
ﺻﻔﺎت ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ): (short adjectivesﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :اﻓﺰودن estﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺻﻔﺖ.
ﺻﻔﺎت ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ) : (long adjectivesﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ :ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﮔﻴﺮي .most
79 ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ theرا اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ:
Short adjectives
old, fastﺻﻔﺎت ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ )ﺗﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺑﻲ(
happy, easyﺻﻔﺎت دو ﺑﺨﺸﻲ )دو ﺳﻴﻼﺑﻲ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
old > the oldestﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ :اﻓﺰودن estﺑﻪ آﺧﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ.
ﺑﻪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي آن st
st ﺖ ﻪ
ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﻛﺎﻓe ﺧﺘ
ﺑﻪ e
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ :ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻪ late > the latestﺗﻐ
late > the latest
ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺰاﻳﻴﻢ.
big > the biggestﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ :ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺮف آﺧﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺣﺮف ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا ،ﺻﺪادار
و ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا ﺑﻮد ،ﺣﺮف ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪاي آﺧﺮ را دوﺑﺎر ﺗﻜﺮار ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ دارﻳﻢ درﺑﺎره ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﺎره زﻣﻴﻦ ) ،(earthﻣﺮﻳﺦ ) (marsو ﻣﺸﺘﺮي ) (Jupiterﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺎت
ﺑﺮﺗﺮ را آﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ درﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﻢ:
80
Earth Mars Jupiter
Diameter (km) 12,760 6,790 142,800 Jupiter is the
biggest.
Distance from 150 228 778 Jupiter is the
Sun (million km)
Sun (million km) most distant
most distant
from the Sun.
Length of day 24 25 10 Jupiter has the
(hours) shortest day.
Moons 1 2 16 Jupiter has the
most moons.
Surface temp. 22 ‐23 ‐150 Jupiter is the
(°C) coldest.
: اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﻢthe ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دارﻳﻢ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ را ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮدش ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از:ﻧﻜﺘﻪ
England is coldest in winter. (not the coldest)
My boss is most generous when we get a big order. (not the most generous)
81
ﺿﻤﻴﺮ
ﻓﺼﻞ دﻫﻢ :ﺿ
ﻓ ﻞ
ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ):(Pronouns
ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي اﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود )ﺑﻪ اﺳﻢ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ اﺷﺎره ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ(
ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪhe, you, ours, themselves, some, each , etc :
اﮔﺮ در ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ زﺑﺎن ﺿﻤﻴﺮ وﺟﻮد ﻧﻤﻲ داﺷﺖ آﻧﮕﺎه ﻣﺠﺒﻮر ﺑﻮدﻳﻢ در ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد اﺳﺎﻣﻲ را ﭘﻲ در ﭘﻲ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل
ﻧﺪارد:
ﻣﺜﺎل ﻓﻓﺮض ﺑﺮ آآن ﺑﻮده ﻛﻛﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ وﺟﻮد ا
ﻛﻨﻴﺪف در ااﻳﻦ ﺎل
زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛ ف
Do you like the president? I don't like the president. The president is too pompous.
در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ:
Do you like the president? I don't like him. He is too pompous.
ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻫﺎي ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ):(Personal Pronouns
ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ درر
ي ﻬﻮ ﺑﺮاي
آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ) .ﺑﺮ
ﻴﺰ ور
ﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ
ول ﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﻠﻜﻲ
ﺟﺪول ﻳﻦ ﺟ
ﻛﻨﻴﺪ .درر اﻳﻦ
ﻣﻲ ﻴﻲ ررا ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻲ ﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ول زﻳﺮ ﻴﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ
ﺟﺪول
درر ﺟ
ﻳﺎدﮔﻴﺮي( ﺗﺎ اﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در اﻳﻦ ﺟﺪول:
= Pronounsﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ
= Numberﺗﻌﺪاد
= Personﺷﺨﺺ )ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻫﻤﺎن اول ﺷﺨﺺ و دوم ﺷﺨﺺ و ...ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(
= Genderﺟﻨﺴﻴﺖ
G d
= Subjectﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﺎر
= Objectﺷﻲء
= Possessiveﻣﻠﻜﻲ
= Reflexiveاﺷﺎره ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺎن subject
= Possessive adjectiveﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﻠﻜﻲ
ﻲ j
= Mﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺎن male
= Fﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﻣﻮﻧﺚ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺎن female
number *person gender pronouns Possessive
subject object possessive reeflexiv adjectives
singular
g 1st m/f
/ I me mine myself
y myy
2nd m/f you you yours yourself your
3rd m he him his himself his
f she her hers herself her
n it it its itself its
plural
p 1st m/f we us ours ourselve our
2nd m/f you you yours yourselves your
3rd m/f/n they them theirs themselves their
82
:ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
subject She likes homework.
pronoun object The teacher gave me some homework.
possessive
i Thi h
This homework is yours.
ki
reflexive John did the homework himself.
possessive adjective The teacher corrected our homework.
83
اﺿﺎﻓﻪ
ف ا ﺎﻓ
ﻞ ﺎﻳﺎزدﻫﻢ :ﺣﺮوف
ﻓﻓﺼﻞ
ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ):(Propositions list
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ proposition :ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﻗﺮاري ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر
ﻣﻲ رود.
در زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺪود 150ﺣﺮف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ وﺟﻮد دارد .ﻛﻪ اﻟﺒﺘﻪ در ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺪاد اﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰي ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ
رﺳﺪ .ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﻣﺎ از ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻔﺮد ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻔﺮد دﻳﮕﺮ در ﺟﻤﻼت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ
ﻛﻨﻴﻢ. در ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ to ،ofو in ﺟﺰء ده ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد در زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
در زﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ از ﺣﺮوف اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮل و ﺗﻜﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ اي را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪو ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎري از اﻳﻦ ﺣﺮوف
اﺿﺎﻓﻪ داراي ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻲ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ و ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دﻗﻴﻖ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ دﻳﻜﺸﻨﺮي ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ:
aboard considering per
about despite plus
above down regarding
across during round
after except save
against excepting since
along excluding than
amid following through
among for to
anti from toward
around in towards
as insided under
d
at into underneath
before like unlike
behind minus until
below near up
b
beneath h off upon
beside off versus
besides on via
between onto with
beyond opposite within
b t
but outside
t id without
ith t
by over
concerning past
84
ﻓﺼﻞ دوازدﻫﻢ :ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ در زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري
ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري:
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺑﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ روﻧﺪ ،اﻓﻌﺎل دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ
ﻛﻪ وﻗﺘﻲ در زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ روﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ و ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻣﺎ ﻧﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده
ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻨﺪ..
ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي دﻳﮕﺮي ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻨﺪ
اﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮده ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ:
ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از اﻓﻌﺎل ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ آﻧﻬﺎ را در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ .ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ را ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﺳﺎده ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ و ﻧﻪ اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري:
hate, like, love, need, prefer, want, wish
believe, imagine, know, mean, realize, recognize, remember, suppose,
understand
belong, concern, consist, contain, depend, involve, matter, need, owe, own,
possess
appear, resemble, seem,
hear, see
ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻴ
ﻣﺜﺎل ﻮﺟ
ﭼﻨﺪ ل ﺑﺑﻪ ﭼ
I want a coffee. not I am wanting a coffee.
I don't believe you are right. not I am not believing you are right.
?Does this pen belong to you ?not Is this pen belonging to you
It seemed wrong. not It was seeming wrong.
I don't hear anything. not I am not hearing anything.
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ اﻓﻌﺎل seeو ﻳﺎ hearرا ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ canﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ.
)I can see someone in the distance. (not I am seeing someone in the distance
)I can't hear you very well. (not I am not hearing you very well
Stative sense Dynamic sense
(no real action) (a kind of action)
Simple only Continuous Simple
I think she is beautiful. Be quiet. I'm thinking. I will think about this
problem tomorrow.
I don't consider that he We are considering your job We consider every job
is the right man for the application and will give you our application very carefully.
job. answer in a few days.
This table measures 4x 6 She is measuring the room for a A good carpenter
feet. new carpet. measures his wood
carefully.
Does the wine taste I was tasting the wine when I I always taste wine before I
good? dropped the glass. drink it.
Mary has three children. Please phone later. We are having We have dinner at 8pm
dinner now. every day.
London is the capital of UK. ( not London is being the capital of UK)
Is she beautiful? (not Is she being beautiful?)
Is she beautiful? (not Is she being beautiful?)
Were you late? (not Were you being late?)
86
اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮم. را ﺑﺎ زﻣﺎن ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢbe ﺑﻌﻀﻲ اوﻗﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ
.(behave or act) . رﻓﺘﺎر ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، ﻋﻤﻞbe واﻗﻌﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ
Mary is a careful person. (Mary is John is being careful. (John is acting carefully now,
always careful ‐ it's her nature.) but maybe he is not always careful – we don't
know.)
Is he always so stupid? (Is that his They were being really stupid. (They were
personality?)
p y ) g y p y
behaving really stupidly at that moment.) )
Andrew is not usually selfish. (It is not Why is he being so selfish? (Why is he acting so
Andrew's character to be selfish.) selfishly at the moment?)
: را ﺑﺮاي زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻤﺮاري ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪbe در زﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻓﻌﻞ
I am being
You are being
He, she, it is being
We are being
They are being
They are being
." ﺗﻔﺎوت ﻗﺎﺋﻠﻴﻢto be being sick” " وto be sick” دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ
( )او اﻻن ﺣﺎﻟﺶ ﺧﻮب ﻧﻴﺴﺖShe is sick.
( )او داره ﻣﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻴﺸﻪShe is being sick.
87
ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ راﻳﮕﺎن
ﻛﻠﻤﺎت ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدي (useful vocabulary)
و
ﺿﺮب اﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ (English proverbs)
ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ در ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اول presentﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﻫﺪﻳﻪ اﺳﺖ) .اﺳﻢ(
در ﺟﻤﻠﻪ دوم presentﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﺣﺎل ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ) .ﺻﻔﺖ(
در ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮم presentﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي ﻣﻬﻴﺎ و آﻣﺎده ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺖ) .ﻓﻌﻞ(
در ﺟﻤﻠﻪ آﺧﺮ presentﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎي اﻛﻨﻮن ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎن ﺣﺎل اﺳﺖ) .ﻗﻴﺪ(
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ در ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻨﺠﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد
ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ آورﻳﻢ و اﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺳﺮو ﻛﺎر داﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ واژﮔﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ و ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺮدن.
اﺳﻢ ) ( Noun
اﺳﻢ در ﻫﺮ زﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪن ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮاﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰي ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود .اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ دو
دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﻋﺎم )(common nouns
(common nouns) ﻫﺎي ﻋﺎ
ااﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ
اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص )( proper nouns
اﺳﻢ ﻋﺎم اﺳﻤﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻤﻪ اﻓﺮاد ﻫﻤﺠﻨﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ man‐ city‐ book‐ girl :ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺮ دﺧﺘﺮ ،ﻛﺘﺎب ،ﺷﻬﺮ
و ﻣﺮدي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد.
88
اﺳﻢ ﺧﺎص اﺳﻤﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻓﺮد ﻳﺎ اﻓﺮادي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص و ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ از آن ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ
ﻣﻜﺎن و ...ﺑﺎ آن ﻧﻮع ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﺧﺎص ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد .ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ.Iran ‐ Tehran ‐ Ali ‐ John :
ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻲ در دﻧﻴﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد اﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪام از
ﻋﻠﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﻫﻴﭻ اﻧﺴﺎن ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪ در ﺻﺪ ﻋﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد.
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ اﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﺎً ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻔﺮد ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ .اﻣﺎ
ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﻣﻔﺮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺎﺷﻨﺪ
ﻊو ﻔ د ﺟﻤﻊ
ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺟ
ااﺳﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻋﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺗ اﻧﻨﺪ
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ اﺳﻢ:
اﺳﻢ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺑﺮ دو ﻗﺴﻢ اﺳﺖ :اﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮد Singular :و اﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ.Plural :
ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ اﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ آﺧﺮ اﺳﻢ ﺣﺮف sاﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد.ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
boy boys
girl girls
desk desks
lion lions
اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪادي از آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺮور ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
.1ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ آﺧﺮﺷﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮوف s‐ sh‐ ch‐ xﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن esﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ .ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
bus buses
bus buses
brush brushes
box boxes
watch watches
ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ oﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ esﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ اﻣﺎ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ.
potato potatoes
tomato tomatoes
radio radios
piano pianos
.2ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮف yﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ اﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ از yﺣﺮف ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪا )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﺣﺮوف (a‐ i‐ e‐ o‐ u وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ
ﺑﻪ iesﻣﻲ ﺷ د
ﺷﻮد. ﻞ ﻪ ﺣﺮف yﺗ ﺪ
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣ ف
ﺎﺷﺪ
country countries
dictionary dictionaries
lady ladies
اﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺣﺮف yﺣﺮف ﺻﺪادار وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ.
boy boys
.3ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ fﻳﺎ feﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺮوف ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ vesﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
wife wives
wolf wolves
knife knives 89
.4ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻣﺤﺪودي از ﻛﻠﻤﺎت وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺟﻤﻊ ﺧﺎص
ﺧﻮدﺷﺎن را دارﻧﺪ.
man men
woman women
tooth teeth
foot
foot feet
feet
goose geese
child children
اﻣﻼي ﻛﻠﻤﺎت
اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ دارد ﻛﻪ اﻣﻼي ﺑﺴﻴﺎري از ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ رﻳﺸﻪ ﻓﺮاﻧﺴﻮي دارد را ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﺪ ،در ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲﻫﺎ
ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺬف
ﻧﻴﺎز ﻧ ﺖ
ﺣﺮوﻓﻲ ارا ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮردد ﻧ ﺎز
اﻳﻦ ،آﻧﻬﺎ ﺣ ﻓ
ﻋﻼوهه ﺑﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ
ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪ .ﻋﻼ
ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻨ ﻳ ﻨﺪ
ﺎت راا ﻫ ﺎﻧﻄ
ﻛﻠﻤﺎت
ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻠ
ﺑ ﺸﺘ
ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ:
British English American English
colour color
centre center
honour honor
analyse analyze
cheque check
tyre tire
favour favor
اﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻫﺮ دو ﻧﺴﺨﻪي آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ و ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،اﻣﺎ اﻣﻼي آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺳﺎدهﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ.
ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮر ﻛﻠﻲ از اﻣﻼي آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ،ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮاﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﭼﻴﺰي
ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ.
ﻟﻐﺖ
در ﺟﺪول ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﺪاول ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻣﻌﺎدل آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ آن اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ:
90
British English American English ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ
93
:اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻴﻮه ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ
Bl k M lb
Black Mulberry ﺷﺎه ﺗﻮت
ﺷﺎ M l
Melon ﺧﺮﺑﺰه
ﺧ
Common Cantaloupe –
زاﻟﺰاﻟﻚ ﻃﺎﻟﺒﻲ
Hawthorn Fruit Muskmelon
94
:اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻏﻞ ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ
97
اﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺣﻴﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ:
Animal Meaning Animal Meaning
Fox روﺑﺎه bull ﮔﺎو ﻧﺮ
Bear ﺧﺮس cow ﮔﺎو ﻣﺎده
polar bear
l b ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ﺧﺮس ﻗﻄ ﺧ calf
lf ﮔﻮﺳﺎﻟﻪ
ﮔ ﺎﻟ
koala bear ﻛﻮاﻻ horse اﺳﺐ
Panda ﺧﺮس ﭘﺎﻧﺪا mule ﻗﺎﻃﺮ
Wolf ﮔﺮگ pony اﺳﺐ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه
Tiger ﺑﺒﺮ donkey اﻻغ
Lion ﺷﻴﺮﺷ sheep ﮔﻮﺳﻔﻨﺪ
ﮔ ﻔ
Leopard ﭘﻠﻨﮓ lamb ﺑﺮه
Hyena ﻛﻔﺘﺎر goat ﺑﺰ
Elephant ﻓﻴﻞ kid ﺑﺰﻏﺎﻟﻪ
Zebra ﮔﻮرﺧﺮ pig ﺧﻮك ،ﮔﺮاز
giraffe ز اﻓﻪ
زراﻓﻪ sow ﺧﻮك ﺎﻟﻎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﻣﺎده ﺧ ك
ﺎد
buffalo ﺑﻮﻓﺎﻟﻮ piglet ﺑﭽﻪ ﺧﻮك
camel ﺷﺘﺮ cat ﮔﺮﺑﻪ
raccoon راﻛﻮن dog ﺳﮓ
skunk راﺳﻮ mouse ﻣﻮش
beaver ﺳﮓ آآﺑﻲ
ﮓ bat ﺧﻔﺎش
boar ﮔﺮاز ﻧﺮ squirrel ﺳﻨﺠﺎب
possum ﺻﺎرﻳﻎ chipmunk ﺳﻨﺠﺎب راه راه
kangaroo ﻛﺎﻧﮕﻮرو rabbit ﺧﺮﮔﻮش
porcupine ﺟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻴﻐﻲ moose ﮔﻮزن ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ
mole ﻛﻮر
ﻣﻮش ﻛﻮ buck
buck ﺧﺮﮔﻮش ﻧﻧﺮ
ﮔﻮزن ﻧﻧﺮ ،ﺧ ﮔﻮش
armadillo ﮔﻮرﻛﻦ doe ﮔﻮزنﻣﺎده،ﺧﺮﮔﻮشﻣﺎده
anteater ﻣﻮرﭼﻪ ﺧﻮار fawn آﻫﻮ ﺑﺮه
gorilla ﮔﻮرﻳﻞ ram ﻗﻮچ ،ﮔﻮﺳﻔﻨﺪ ﻧﺮ
hippo اﺳﺐ آﺑﻲ monkey ﻣﻴﻤﻮن
muskrat ﻣﻮش آﺑآﺑﻲ
ش jack اﻻغ ﻧﻧﺮ اﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪه
ram ﮔﻮﺳﻔﻨﺪ ﻧﺮ buffalo ﮔﺎوﻣﻴﺶ
ewe ﮔﻮﺳﻔﻨﺪ ﻣﺎده alligator ﺗﻤﺴﺎح
98
snake ﻣﺎر crocodile ﺳﻮﺳﻤﺎر
ass ﺧﺮ puppy ﺳﮓ ﺗﻮﻟﻪ
owl ﺟﻐﺪ tortoise ﻻك ﭘﺸﺖ
scorpion ﻋﻘﺮب mold ﻛﭙﻚ
rutile رﺗﻴﻞ toad وزغ
ostrich ﺷﺘﺮ ﻣﺮغ crab ﺧﺮﭼﻨﮓ
whale وال quail ﺑﻠﺪرﭼﻴﻦ
dolphin دﻟﻔﻴﻦ shark ﻛﻮﺳﻪ
99
:اﺳﺎﻣﻲ رﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ
100
:اﺳﺎﻣﻲ اﻋﻀﺎي ﺑﺪن ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎن اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ
Body limbs Meaning Body limbs Meaning
artery ﺳﺮﺧﺮگ skull ﺟﻤﺠﻤﻪ
skin ﭘﻮﺳﺖ brain ﻣﻐﺰ
pupil ﭼﺸﻢ
ﻣﺮدﻣﻚ ﭼﺸ
ﻣ دﻣﻚ eardrum ﭘﺮده ﮔﻮش
ﭘ ده
finger اﻧﮕﺸﺖ nostril ﺳﻮراخ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ
nail ﻧﺎﺧﻦ skeleton اﺳﻜﻠﺖ
mustache ﺳﺒﻴﻞ bone اﺳﺘﺨﻮان
beard رﻳﺶ muscle ﻣﺎﻫﻴﭽﻪ
eyebrow اﺑﺮو hand دﺳﺖ
brow ﭘﻴﺸﺎﻧﻲ arm ﺑﺎزو
eyelid ﭘﻠﻚ elbow آرﻧﺞ
eyelash ﻣﮋه throat ﮔﻠﻮ
lip ﻟﺐ palm ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ
toe ﭘﻨﺠﻪ chest ﺳﻴﻨﻪ
thumb اﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺷﺴﺖ heart ﻗﻠﺐ
shoulder ﺷﺎﻧﻪ appendix آﭘﺎﻧﺪﻳﺲ
back ﻛﻤﺮ kidney ﻛﻠﻴﻪ
hip ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ران liver ﻛﺒﺪ
pelvis ﻟﮕﻦ cheek ﮔﻮﻧﻪ
stomach ﺷﻜﻢ leg ران
knee زاﻧﻮ stalk ﺳﺎق
cartilage ﻏﻀﺮوف sole ﻛﻒ ﭘﺎ
joint ﻣﻔﺼﻞ heel ﭘﺎﺷﻨﻪ
101
(English proverbs)
اﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ )English proverbs
ﻫﺎي اﻧﮕﻠ
اﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺎ
ﺿﺮب اﻟ ﺜﻞ
ﺿ
A poor workman blames his tools.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻛﺎرﮔﺮ ﺑﻲﻣﻬﺎرت ،اﺑﺰار ﻛﺎرش را ﻣﻘﺼﺮ ﻣﻲداﻧﺪ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻋﺮوس ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮاﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺼﺪ ،ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺖ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺞ اﺳﺖ.
***
A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻧﺪه در دﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻬﺘﺮ از دوﺗﺎ روي درﺧﺖ اﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺳﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﻘﺪ ﺑﻪ از ﺣﻠﻮاي ﻧﺴﻴﻪ
***
Absence makes the heart grow fonder
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :دوري ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻨﺪي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :دوري و دوﺳﺘﻲ
***
A cat may look at a king.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﻫﻲ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺑﻪ اﺳﺐ ﺷﺎه ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﻮ
***
A coward dies a thousand times before his death. The valiant never taste of death but
dd h d b f h d h h l fd hb
once.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺗﺮﺳﻮ ﻫﺰارﺑﺎر ﭘﻴﺶ از ﻣﺮگ ﻣﻲﻣﻴﺮد .آدم ﻧﺘﺮس ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﺰه ﻣﺮگ را ﻣﻲﭼﺸﺪ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺗﺮس ﺑﺮادر ﻣﺮگ اﺳﺖ
***
A creaking door hangs longest and A creaking gate hangs long.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :دري ﻛﻪ ﻏﮋﻏﮋ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﺮش ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :اﺟﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻣﻴﺮد ﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﻤﺎر ﺳﺨﺖ.
***
Actions speak louder than words
kl d h d
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺻﺪاي ﻋﻤﻞ رﺳﺎﺗﺮ از ﺣﺮف اﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :دو ﺻﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﭼﻮن ﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدار ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
102
***
A fool and his money are easily parted.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :اﺣﻤﻖ و ﭘﻮﻟﺶ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ از ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪا ﺷﺪﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺗﺎ اﺑﻠﻪ در ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻪ ،ﻣﻔﻠﺲ در ﻧﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ.
***
A fox smells its own lair first and A fox smells its own stink first.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :روﺑﺎه ﺑﻮي ﮔﻨﺪش را زودﺗﺮ از دﻳﮕﺮان اﺳﺘﺸﻤﺎم ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﭼﻮب را ﻛﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻲ ،ﮔﺮﺑﻪ دزده ﻓﺮار ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ.
***
A friend in need is a friend indeed.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﻴﺎز ،دوﺳﺖ واﻗﻌﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮد
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :دوﺳﺖ آن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻴﺮد دﺳﺖ دوﺳﺖ /در ﭘﺮﻳﺸﺎنﺣﺎﻟﻲ و درﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ
***
A good man in an e il societ seems the greatest illain of all
A good man in an evil society seems the greatest villain of all.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :اﻧﺴﺎن ﻧﻴﻚ در ﺟﻤﻊ اﺷﺮار ،ﺷﺮﻳﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ آن ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲرﺳﺪ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺑﺎ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻨﺸﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺪ ﺷﻮي /ﺧﻮرﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺰرﮔﻲ را ﭘﺎره اي اﺑﺮ ﺗﻴﺮه ﻛﻨﺪ.
***
A jack of all trades is master of none.
j
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎر اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲدﻫﺪ اﺳﺘﺎد ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺎري ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻫﻤﻪﻛﺎره و ﻫﻴﭻﻛﺎره
***
A miss by an inch is a miss by a mile.
ﻣﺎﻳﻞ.
ﻳﻚ ﺎ ﻞ
ﭼﻪ ﻚ
اﻳﻨﭻ ،ﻪ
ﻳﻚ ا ﻨ
ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﻪﻪ ﻚ
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻟﻐﺰش ددر ﻞ
ﺗ ﻪ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :آب ﻛﻪ از ﺳﺮ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻳﻚ وﺟﺐ ،ﭼﻪ ﺻﺪ وﺟﺐ.
***
A penny saved is a penny earned.
ﺳﻮدي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ. ﺷﻮد ،ﻮ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻫﺮﺮ ﭘﻮل ﺳﻴﺎﻫﻲ
ﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲاﻧﺪازز ﻮ ﺮ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻗﻄﺮه ﻗﻄﺮه ﺟﻤﻊ ﮔﺮدد واﻧﮕﻬﻲ درﻳﺎ ﺷﻮد.
***
103
A picture is worth a thousand words.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ از ﻫﺰاران ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﺎﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺷﻨﻴﺪن ﻛﻲ ﺑﻮد ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ دﻳﺪن
***
All t l
All cats love fish but hate to get their paws wet.
fi h b t h t t t th i t
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺑﻪاي ﻣﺎﻫﻲ را دوﺳﺖ دارد اﻣﺎ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﻮﻟﺶ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻴﺰار اﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻧﺎﺑﺮده رﻧﺞ ،ﮔﻨﺞ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮد /ﻣﺰد آن ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺟﺎن ﺑﺮادر ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮد
***
All roads lead to Rome.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻫﻤﻪ راهﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ رم راه ﺑﺮﻧﺪ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻫﺮﺟﺎ ﺑﺮي آﺳﻤﻮن ﻫﻤﻴﻦ رﻧﮕﻪ
***
All that glisters is not gold.
درﺧﺸﺪ ﻃﻼ ﻧ ﺖ
ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺸ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮدي ﮔﺮدو ﻧﻴﺴﺖ
***
All things come to he who waits.
ﻲررﺳﺪ.
ﭼﻴﺰﺰ ﻣﻲ
ﻫﺮﻛﻪ ﺻﺒﺮﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼ
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺮ
ﺮ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﮔﺮ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻲ ز ﻏﻮره ﺣﻠﻮا ﺳﺎزي
***
As you make your bed, so you must lie in it.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :رﺧﺘﺨﻮاﺑﺖ را ﻛﻪ ﭘﻬﻦ ﻛﺮدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در آن ﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﻮاﺑﻲ
ﻧﺨﻮري ﺎﺗﻪ
ﭘﺎﺗﻪ ﭘﺎﺗﻪ ﻧﺨ
ﺑﺨﻮري ﺎﺗﻪﺧﺎﻟﺘﻪ ،ﺨ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :آش ﻛﺸﻚ ﺧﺎﻟﺘﻪ
ﺎدل
***
A word to the wise is enough.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻛﻠﻤﻪاي ﺑﻪ داﻧﺎ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺲ اﺳﺖ
ﺲ اﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮف ﺑﺲ ﻲ :در ﺧﺎﻧﻪ اﮔﺮ ﻛﺲ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ
***
104
A word spoken is past recalling.
A d k i t lli
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺟﻤﻠﻪاي ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺗﻴﺮي ﻛﻪ رﻫﺎ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻠﻪ ﺑﺎز ﻧﮕﺮدد.
***
Be careful what you wish for, you might just get it.
y ,y g j g
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﭼﻴﺰي را ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي دﻳﮕﺮان آرزو ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻲ ،ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺧﻮدت ﺷﻮد.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد ﻣﻲ ﭘﺴﻨﺪي ،ﺑﺮاي دﻳﮕﺮان ﺑﭙﺴﻨﺪ.
***
Beauty is in the eye of the beholder.
اﺳﺖ.
ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪه ا ﺖ
زﻳﺒﺎﻳﻲ در ﺸ
ﺗﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺎ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻋﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ دﻫﻦ ﺑﺰي ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ.
***
Better to be thought a fool, than to open your mouth and remove all doubt.
ﺷﻮد.
ﻲ و ﺑﻼﻫﺘﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻮن اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ دﻫﺎﻧﺖ ررا ﺑﺎزز ﻛﻨﻲ
ﺑﻬﺘﺮﺮ ازز آن
آﻳﻲ ،ﻬ
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :اﮔﺮﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﺮ اﺑﻠﻪ ﻲ
ﺮ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﭘﺴﺘﻪ ي ﺑﻲ ﻣﻐﺰ ﭼﻮن ﻟﺐ وا ﻛﻨﺪ رﺳﻮا ﺷﻮد.
***
Better safe than sorry.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ از ﺗﺄﺳﻒ اﺳﺖ.
ﭘﺸﻴﻤﺎﻧﻲ
آرد ﺸ ﺎﻧ
ﺑﺎز آ د
ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺎز
ﻋﺎﻗﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﺎ
ﭼﺮا ﺎﻗﻞ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ا
ﺎدل
***
Birds of a feather flock together.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﭘﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن ﻫﻤﺠﻨﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺮواز ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
ﻢﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﭘﺮواز
ﻢﺟﻨﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻲ :ﻛﺒﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺒﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎز /ﻛﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ
***
Blood will out.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺧﻮن ﻓﻮران ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺧﻮن ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻖ رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻤﺎل ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد.
***
105
***
Clothes make the man.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :اﺣﺘﺮام ﻣﺮد ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﺎس اﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :آﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻧﻮ ﭘﻠﻮ ﺑﺨﻮر!
***
Cowards die many times, but a brave man only dies once.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :آدم ﺗﺮﺳﻮ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻲﻣﻴﺮد ،اﻣﺎ آدم ﺷﺠﺎع ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺗﺮس ﺑﺮادر ﻣﺮگ اﺳﺖ.
***
Cross the stream where it is the shallowest.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :از ﻛﻢﻋﻤﻖﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ رودﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬر ﻛﻦ!
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺑﻲﮔﺪار ﺑﻪ آب ﻧﺰن!
***
Cut your coat according to your cloth
Cut your coat according to your cloth.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺟﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﭘﺎرﭼﻪات ﺑﺪوز!
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﭘﺎ را ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﻮد دراز ﻛﻦ!
***
Don't spit into the wind.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺑﺎد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ وزد ﺗﻒ ﻧﻜﻦ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻒ ﺳﺮﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﻧﻪ
***
Don't cry over spilt milk.
ﮔﺮﻳﻪ ﻧﻜﻦ.
رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﮔ ﻳﻪ
ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻪ
ﺑﺮاي ﺷ
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺑ اي
ﺗ ﺟﻤﻪ
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺣﺴﺮت روﻏﻦ رﻳﺨﺘﻪ را ﻣﺨﻮر.
***
Half a loaf is better than none.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﺎن ﺑﻬﺘﺮ از ﻫﻴﭽﻲ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻛﺎﭼﻲ ﺑﻪ از ﻫﻴﭽﻲ
***
106
Laughter is the best medicine.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺧﻨﺪه ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ دارو اﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﺧﻨﺪه ﺑﺮ ﻫﺮ درد ﺑﻲ درﻣﺎن دواﺳﺖ.
***
T lk f th d il d th d il appears.
Talk of the devil and the devil
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﺣﺮف ﺷﻴﻄﺎن را ﺑﺰن او ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻣﻮش رو آﺗﻴﺶ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻪ
***
You can't have it both ways. y
You can't have your cake and eat it too.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﻧﻲ دوﺗﺎش رو ﺑﺨﻮاي .ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻴﻜﺖ رو ﺑﺨﻮري ﻫﻢ ﻧﮕﻬﺶ داري.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻫﻢ ﺧﺮ و ﻣﻴﺨﻮاي ﻫﻢ ﺧﺮﻣﺎ؟
***
Y
You can't judge a book by its cover.
't j d b k b it
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ :از روي ﺟﻠﺪ ﻛﺘﺎب ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻪ درﺑﺎره اون ﻗﻀﺎت ﻛﺮد.
ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻓﺎرﺳﻲ :ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻪ از روي ﻇﺎﻫﺮ آدم ﻫﺎ ﻗﻀﺎوت ﻛﺮد.
***
107